1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
36 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
37 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
39 % for customized page headers/footers
40 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
42 % change header rule width
43 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
45 % used to have extra space in table cells
46 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
47 {\usepackage{array}}{}
48 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
50 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
51 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
52 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
54 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
56 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
57 \use_default_options false
62 \maintain_unincluded_children false
64 \language_package default
69 \font_typewriter default
71 \font_default_family default
72 \use_non_tex_fonts false
78 \default_output_format default
80 \bibtex_command bibtex
81 \index_command default
85 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
86 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
90 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
91 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
92 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
97 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
98 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
101 \use_package amsmath 1
102 \use_package amssymb 1
103 \use_package cancel 0
105 \use_package mathdots 1
106 \use_package mathtools 0
107 \use_package mhchem 1
108 \use_package stackrel 0
109 \use_package stmaryrd 0
110 \use_package undertilde 0
112 \cite_engine_type default
116 \paperorientation portrait
120 \notefontcolor #0000ff
137 \paragraph_separation indent
138 \paragraph_indentation default
139 \quotes_language english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
163 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
164 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
165 \begin_inset CommandInset href
167 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
178 \begin_inset Newline newline
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Note Note
189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
190 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
191 \begin_inset Newline newline
196 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
204 \begin_layout Standard
205 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
206 LatexCommand tableofcontents
213 \begin_layout Chapter
217 \begin_layout Section
221 \begin_layout Standard
222 LyX is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
261 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
265 \begin_layout Standard
266 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
271 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
275 \begin_layout Standard
280 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
281 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
282 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
283 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
289 manual describes that, too.
292 \begin_layout Section
296 \begin_layout Standard
297 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
299 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
300 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
304 \begin_layout Standard
305 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
306 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
307 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
309 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
310 only a vertical scrollbar.
311 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
312 The first case is large images.
313 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
314 image and use the option
320 LaTeX and LyX options
323 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
325 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
326 this doesn't work for equations yet.
329 \begin_layout Standard
330 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
338 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
345 \begin_layout Section
349 \begin_layout Standard
350 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
351 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
352 Just select the manual you want to read from the
359 \begin_layout Section
361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
363 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
370 \begin_layout Standard
371 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
373 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
377 \begin_inset Index idx
380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
386 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
387 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
388 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
390 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
391 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
396 \begin_inset space \space{}
399 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
400 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
402 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
406 \begin_inset Index idx
409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
410 Reconfiguration of LyX
415 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
418 \begin_layout Section
420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
422 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
429 \begin_layout Standard
430 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
431 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
433 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
434 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
438 \begin_layout Standard
439 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
441 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
442 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
445 \begin_layout Standard
446 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
447 you can view from the menu
449 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
468 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
469 reconfigure LyX (menu
471 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
475 \begin_inset Note Note
478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
479 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
487 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
488 More about TeX Code is described in section
493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
495 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
499 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
506 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
516 \begin_inset Index idx
519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
520 Reconfiguration of LyX
525 See section 5.1 of the
529 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
532 \begin_layout Chapter
536 \begin_layout Section
537 Basic File Operations
538 \begin_inset Index idx
541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
550 \begin_layout Standard
555 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
556 in addition to some more advanced operations:
559 \begin_layout Itemize
581 \begin_layout Itemize
597 arg "buffer-new-template"
603 \begin_layout Itemize
625 \begin_layout Itemize
635 \begin_layout Itemize
649 \begin_layout Itemize
671 \begin_layout Itemize
683 arg "buffer-write-as"
689 \begin_layout Itemize
703 \begin_layout Itemize
711 arg "dialog-show print"
719 arg "dialog-show print"
725 \begin_layout Itemize
739 \begin_layout Standard
740 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
741 a few minor differences.
744 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
755 command lists the available templates.
756 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
757 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
758 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
766 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
773 \begin_layout Standard
774 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
806 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
807 space is just that — a big, blank space.
815 \begin_layout Standard
836 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
841 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
843 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
861 will reload the document from disk.
862 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
863 and want to restore it to the last save.
872 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
873 them as your changes.
876 \begin_layout Section
877 Basic Editing Features
878 \begin_inset Index idx
881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
890 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
897 \begin_layout Standard
898 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
899 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
900 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
901 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
903 We will start with cut and paste.
906 \begin_layout Standard
907 As you might expect, the
911 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
912 various other editing features.
913 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
917 \begin_layout Itemize
923 \begin_inset Index idx
926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
955 \begin_layout Itemize
961 \begin_inset Index idx
964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
993 \begin_layout Itemize
999 \begin_inset Index idx
1002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1027 \begin_layout Itemize
1031 \begin_inset space ~
1037 \begin_layout Itemize
1041 \begin_inset space ~
1047 \begin_layout Itemize
1051 \begin_inset space ~
1055 \begin_inset space ~
1061 \begin_inset Index idx
1064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1073 \begin_inset Index idx
1076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1091 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1101 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1107 \begin_layout Standard
1108 The first three are self-explanatory.
1109 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by
1130 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1131 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1136 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1137 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1138 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1139 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1140 into individual cells.
1144 \begin_inset space ~
1149 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1150 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1154 \begin_layout Standard
1158 \begin_inset space ~
1163 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1165 These include HTML, LaTeX, Linkback
1166 \begin_inset space ~
1173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1179 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1180 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1181 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1187 \begin_inset space \space{}
1190 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1191 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1194 \begin_inset space ~
1197 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1203 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1207 \begin_inset space ~
1216 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1217 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1219 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1223 \begin_inset space ~
1228 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1229 start a new paragraph.
1230 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1235 \begin_inset space ~
1238 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1255 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1258 paste from the primary selection.
1259 This is normally the currently selected text.
1262 \begin_layout Standard
1265 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1271 \begin_inset space ~
1279 \begin_inset space ~
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1289 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
1294 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1297 \begin_inset space ~
1306 \begin_inset space ~
1311 button to skip the current word.
1315 \begin_inset space ~
1320 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1324 \begin_inset space ~
1329 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1331 If the toggle is set, searching for
1332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1343 will not match the word
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1358 Match whole words only
1360 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
1361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1389 LyX offers also an advanced
1392 \begin_inset space ~
1396 \begin_inset space ~
1401 feature that is described in sec.
1402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1408 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1415 \begin_layout Standard
1416 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1417 \begin_inset space \space{}
1421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1429 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1431 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1436 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1443 \begin_layout Standard
1444 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
1447 arg "inset-select-all"
1453 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1456 selects the whole document.
1459 \begin_layout Section
1461 \begin_inset Index idx
1464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1471 \begin_inset Index idx
1474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1483 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1490 \begin_layout Standard
1491 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1492 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1495 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1498 or the toolbar button
1504 to undo some mistake.
1505 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1507 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1510 or the toolbar button
1517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1524 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1525 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1528 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1531 \begin_layout Standard
1532 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1541 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1542 This is a consequence of the 100
1543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1546 step undo limit mentioned above.
1549 \begin_layout Standard
1558 work on almost everything in LyX.
1559 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1563 \begin_layout Section
1565 \begin_inset Index idx
1568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1577 \begin_layout Standard
1578 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1581 \begin_layout Enumerate
1586 \begin_layout Itemize
1591 once anywhere in the edit window.
1592 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1596 \begin_layout Enumerate
1601 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
1616 \begin_layout Itemize
1617 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
1619 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1626 \begin_layout Enumerate
1627 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1631 \begin_layout Standard
1632 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1633 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1637 \begin_layout Section
1639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1641 name "sec:Navigating"
1646 \begin_inset Index idx
1649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1658 \begin_layout Standard
1659 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1662 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1668 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1671 \begin_layout Itemize
1672 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1674 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1676 \begin_inset space ~
1681 or by the toolbar button
1684 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1690 \begin_layout Itemize
1691 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1693 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1696 and use the same menu to return to them.
1697 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1700 \begin_layout Standard
1704 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1709 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1710 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1712 \begin_inset space ~
1717 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1718 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1719 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1720 your last editing position.
1723 \begin_layout Standard
1728 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
1731 \begin_layout Subsection
1733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1735 name "sub:The-Outliner"
1742 \begin_layout Standard
1743 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1744 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1745 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1753 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1757 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1764 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1769 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1773 \begin_layout Standard
1774 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1775 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1776 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1777 dialog and to modify the citation.
1780 \begin_layout Standard
1781 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1783 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1784 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1792 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1795 \begin_layout Standard
1796 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1797 you further to control the display.
1802 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1803 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1809 option keeps it in the current view state.
1810 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1811 \begin_inset space ~
1814 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1815 \begin_inset space ~
1818 3, the subsections of sections
1819 \begin_inset space ~
1822 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1827 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1828 \begin_inset space ~
1832 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1842 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1845 \begin_layout Standard
1847 \begin_inset space \space{}
1851 \begin_inset Graphics
1852 filename ../images/reload.png
1857 \begin_inset space ~
1860 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1861 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1864 \begin_inset space \space{}
1868 \begin_inset Graphics
1869 filename ../images/down.png
1871 groupId toolbarbuttons
1876 \begin_inset space ~
1880 \begin_inset space \space{}
1884 \begin_inset Graphics
1885 filename ../images/up.png
1887 groupId toolbarbuttons
1892 \begin_inset space ~
1895 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1896 So, for example, you can move section
1897 \begin_inset space ~
1901 \begin_inset space ~
1904 2.4 or after section
1905 \begin_inset space ~
1909 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1911 \begin_inset Graphics
1912 filename ../images/promote.png
1914 groupId toolbarbuttons
1919 \begin_inset Graphics
1920 filename ../images/demote.png
1922 groupId toolbarbuttons
1926 (or the corresponding key bindings
1934 ) you can change the level of sections.
1935 So you can for example make section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1950 \begin_layout Section
1951 Input/Word Completion
1952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1954 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1959 \begin_inset Index idx
1962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1969 \begin_inset Index idx
1972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2003 \begin_layout Standard
2004 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2006 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2007 is used to propose completions.
2010 \begin_layout Standard
2011 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
2013 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2018 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2025 \begin_inset space ~
2029 \begin_inset space ~
2034 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2038 \begin_inset space ~
2043 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2044 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2048 \begin_inset space ~
2054 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2055 popup completion and choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
2058 \begin_layout Standard
2059 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
2060 are completions available.
2065 key to accept a proposed completion.
2066 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2067 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2068 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2075 \begin_layout Standard
2076 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2077 ing options for text.
2078 The special math option
2082 enables characters to be composed.
2083 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2084 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2087 , you can then input the characters
2088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2099 to a formula to get it.
2100 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2101 of the math toolbar.
2102 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2106 that is in LyX's installation folder.
2107 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2116 \begin_layout Section
2118 \begin_inset Index idx
2121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2128 \begin_inset Index idx
2131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2160 \begin_inset Index idx
2163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2194 \begin_layout Standard
2195 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2208 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
2210 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2214 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2215 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2221 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
2228 \begin_layout Standard
2232 \begin_inset space ~
2240 \begin_inset space ~
2261 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2265 \begin_layout Labeling
2266 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2270 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2271 LatexCommand nomenclature
2273 description "Tabulator key"
2279 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
2280 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2281 \begin_inset space ~
2285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2287 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2294 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2298 , especially section
2299 \begin_inset space ~
2303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2305 reference "sub:Lists"
2311 If you are still confused, look in the
2316 \begin_inset Newline newline
2323 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2324 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2328 \begin_layout Labeling
2329 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2333 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2334 LatexCommand nomenclature
2336 description "Escape key"
2343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2350 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2351 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2354 \begin_layout Labeling
2355 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2361 \begin_inset space ~
2365 \begin_inset space ~
2372 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2373 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2377 \begin_layout Standard
2378 There are three modifier keys:
2381 \begin_layout Labeling
2382 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2400 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2401 LatexCommand nomenclature
2403 description "Control key"
2407 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2408 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2412 \begin_layout Itemize
2421 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2424 \begin_layout Itemize
2433 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2436 \begin_layout Itemize
2445 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2449 \begin_layout Labeling
2450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2468 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2469 LatexCommand nomenclature
2471 description "Shift key"
2475 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2476 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2479 \begin_layout Labeling
2480 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2498 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2499 LatexCommand nomenclature
2501 description "Alt or Meta key"
2505 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2506 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2507 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2513 \begin_inset Newline newline
2516 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2518 menu accelerator keys
2521 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2522 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2526 \begin_layout Standard
2527 For example, the sequence
2528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2534 \begin_inset space ~
2538 \begin_inset space ~
2544 \begin_inset space ~
2552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2571 \begin_inset space ~
2577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2587 \begin_layout Standard
2592 manual lists all other things bound to the
2600 \begin_layout Standard
2601 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2602 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
2603 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
2604 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2605 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
2606 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2607 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2609 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2625 followed by a capital
2632 \begin_layout Chapter
2634 \begin_inset Index idx
2637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2646 \begin_layout Section
2648 \begin_inset Index idx
2651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2660 \begin_layout Subsection
2664 \begin_layout Standard
2665 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2666 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2667 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2668 numbering schemes, and so on.
2669 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2670 and format the title of your document differently.
2673 \begin_layout Standard
2678 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2679 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2680 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2681 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
2682 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2685 \begin_layout Subsection
2687 \begin_inset Index idx
2690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2699 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2706 \begin_layout Standard
2707 You can select a class using the
2709 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2710 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2714 \begin_inset Index idx
2717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2724 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2728 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2732 \begin_layout Standard
2733 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
2737 \begin_layout Description
2738 Article for basic articles
2741 \begin_layout Description
2742 Report for basic reports
2745 \begin_layout Description
2746 Book for writing a book
2749 \begin_layout Description
2750 Letter for US-style letters
2753 \begin_layout Standard
2754 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
2755 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
2756 will include many of these.
2757 Here are some of the classes.
2758 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2760 Special Document Classes
2769 \begin_layout Description
2770 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2773 \begin_layout Description
2774 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2778 \begin_layout Description
2779 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2783 \begin_layout Description
2784 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2785 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2786 There are three article layouts available.
2787 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2788 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2789 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2790 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2795 sequential numbering
2796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2799 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2800 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2801 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2802 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2805 \begin_layout Description
2806 Beamer Layout for presentations
2809 \begin_layout Description
2810 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2811 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2815 \begin_layout Description
2816 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2819 \begin_layout Description
2821 \begin_inset space ~
2824 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2827 \begin_layout Description
2828 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2831 \begin_layout Description
2832 Foils Used to make transparencies
2835 \begin_layout Description
2836 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2837 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2841 \begin_layout Description
2842 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2843 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2846 \begin_layout Description
2847 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2850 \begin_layout Description
2851 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2854 \begin_layout Description
2855 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2856 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2857 (Is used by this document.)
2860 \begin_layout Description
2861 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2864 \begin_layout Description
2865 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2868 \begin_layout Description
2873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2880 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2881 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2883 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
2886 \begin_layout Description
2887 Slides Used to make transparencies
2890 \begin_layout Description
2892 \begin_inset space ~
2895 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2896 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2899 \begin_layout Description
2900 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2903 \begin_layout Standard
2904 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2906 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2912 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2913 of the document classes.
2916 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2920 \begin_layout Standard
2921 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2923 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2924 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2926 \begin_inset Index idx
2929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2946 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2947 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2949 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2954 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
2955 and some of them, like
2959 , are highly specialized.
2960 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
2961 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
2963 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2964 by some document class.
2965 There are just too many of them.
2966 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2969 \begin_layout Standard
2970 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2978 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2979 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2980 document class for a new file.
2981 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2986 Installing new LaTeX files
2987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2994 manual for information on how to install them.
2995 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3001 \begin_layout Standard
3002 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
3003 does not include support for every document class people might want to
3005 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
3006 dissertations submitted to those universities.
3007 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3009 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3013 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3019 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3022 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3031 \begin_inset Index idx
3034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3043 \begin_layout Standard
3044 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3045 chosen document class.
3046 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3047 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3054 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3058 \begin_inset Index idx
3061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3068 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3072 \begin_layout Standard
3073 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
3074 always installed by default.
3075 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3076 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3077 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3078 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
3079 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
3080 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3081 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
3084 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3088 \begin_inset Index idx
3091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3092 Reconfiguration of LyX
3098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3101 Installing new LaTeX files
3102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3109 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3112 \begin_layout Standard
3113 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3121 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3122 LyX will advise you about these things.
3130 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3134 name "sub:Local-Layout"
3139 \begin_inset Index idx
3142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3143 Document ! Local Layout
3151 \begin_layout Standard
3152 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
3153 used in a variety of different documents.
3154 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3155 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3156 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3157 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3158 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
3159 What you want is LyX's
3160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3176 manual for information on how to use it.
3179 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3183 \begin_layout Standard
3184 Each class has a default set of options.
3185 Here's a quick table describing them:
3188 \begin_layout Standard
3189 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3195 \begin_layout Standard
3197 \begin_inset Tabular
3198 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3199 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
3200 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3201 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3202 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3203 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3204 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3658 \begin_layout Standard
3659 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3665 \begin_layout Standard
3666 You're probably also wondering what
3667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3671 \begin_inset space ~
3675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3679 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3680 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3685 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3690 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3700 headings, there are also
3708 headings, and so on.
3709 We will describe these headings fully in section
3710 \begin_inset space ~
3714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3716 reference "sub:Headings"
3723 \begin_layout Subsection
3725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3727 name "sub:Document-Layout"
3732 \begin_inset Index idx
3735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3744 \begin_inset Index idx
3747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3756 \begin_layout Standard
3757 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3759 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3766 \begin_inset space ~
3774 \begin_inset space ~
3779 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3781 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
3782 to use for your document.
3783 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
3787 \begin_layout Standard
3791 \begin_inset space ~
3798 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3804 \begin_inset space ~
3809 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3810 You can choose between the following five options:
3813 \begin_layout Labeling
3814 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3819 Use default page style of current class.
3822 \begin_layout Labeling
3823 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3828 No page numbers or headings.
3831 \begin_layout Labeling
3832 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3840 \begin_layout Labeling
3841 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3846 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3847 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
3848 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
3851 \begin_layout Labeling
3852 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3857 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3858 have the LaTeX-package
3863 \begin_inset Index idx
3866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3867 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
3873 How they are defined is explained in section
3874 \begin_inset space ~
3878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3880 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3887 \begin_layout Standard
3888 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3889 \begin_inset space ~
3893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3895 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3902 \begin_layout Subsection
3903 Paper Size and Orientation
3904 \begin_inset Index idx
3907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3908 Document ! Paper size
3914 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3916 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3923 \begin_layout Standard
3924 You can find the following options in the menu
3927 \begin_inset space ~
3934 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3940 \begin_inset Index idx
3943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3952 \begin_layout Labeling
3953 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3957 \begin_inset space ~
3962 What size paper to print on.
3967 \begin_layout Itemize
3973 \begin_layout Itemize
3979 \begin_layout Itemize
3985 \begin_layout Itemize
3991 \begin_layout Itemize
3994 US letter, US legal, US executive
3997 \begin_layout Itemize
4003 \begin_layout Itemize
4010 \begin_layout Labeling
4011 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4016 To choose whether to output as
4027 \begin_layout Labeling
4028 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4032 \begin_inset space ~
4037 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4038 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4041 \begin_layout Subsection
4043 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4050 \begin_inset Index idx
4053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4060 \begin_inset Index idx
4063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4072 \begin_layout Standard
4073 Paper margins are set in the menu
4075 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4079 \begin_inset Index idx
4082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4091 \begin_layout Standard
4092 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4093 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4094 the paper format and the font size into account.
4097 \begin_layout Subsection
4101 \begin_layout Standard
4102 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
4107 That includes the paragraph environments.
4108 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4109 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4110 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
4111 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4120 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4122 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4123 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4124 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4127 \begin_layout Section
4128 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4129 \begin_inset Index idx
4132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4133 Paragraph ! Indentation
4141 \begin_layout Subsection
4143 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4145 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4152 \begin_layout Standard
4153 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4154 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4157 \begin_layout Standard
4158 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4159 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4160 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4161 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4165 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4171 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4172 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4173 language than English.
4174 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
4178 \begin_layout Standard
4179 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4180 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4182 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4183 LyX takes care of that.
4184 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4186 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
4187 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
4188 of a page, and so on.
4192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4193 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
4198 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4199 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
4203 these pre-coded spacings.
4204 We will explain more later.
4207 \begin_layout Subsection
4208 Paragraph Separation
4209 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4211 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
4216 \begin_inset Index idx
4219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4220 Paragraph ! Separation
4228 \begin_layout Standard
4236 \begin_inset space ~
4244 \begin_inset space ~
4251 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4255 \begin_inset Index idx
4258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4264 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4267 \begin_layout Subsection
4271 \begin_layout Standard
4272 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4275 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4277 \begin_inset space ~
4282 dialog and toggle the
4285 \begin_inset space ~
4290 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4293 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4297 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4298 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4302 \begin_layout Standard
4303 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4304 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4307 \begin_layout Subsection
4309 \begin_inset Index idx
4312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4313 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4321 \begin_layout Standard
4324 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4328 \begin_inset Index idx
4331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4340 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4344 \begin_inset space ~
4353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4354 You need to have the LaTeX-package
4359 \begin_inset Index idx
4362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4363 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
4368 installed to use this feature.
4373 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4375 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4377 \begin_inset space ~
4382 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4383 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4386 \begin_layout Section
4387 Paragraph Environments
4388 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4390 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4395 \begin_inset Index idx
4398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4399 Paragraph ! Environments
4405 \begin_inset Index idx
4408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4409 Paragraph environments|(
4417 \begin_layout Subsection
4421 \begin_layout Standard
4422 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4425 \begin_layout Standard
4444 \begin_inset Newline newline
4447 command sequence in LaTeX files.
4448 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4449 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4458 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4461 \begin_layout Standard
4462 A paragraph environment is simply a
4463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4470 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4471 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4472 scheme, labels, and so on.
4473 Additionally, you can
4474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4481 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4482 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4483 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4484 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4486 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4488 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4491 \begin_layout Standard
4492 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4493 \begin_inset Graphics
4494 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4500 at the left end of the toolbar.
4501 LyX will change the environment of the
4505 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4506 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4507 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4511 \begin_layout Standard
4520 create a new paragraph using the
4524 paragraph environment.
4526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4533 because if you are in one of these environments:
4536 \begin_layout Itemize
4542 \begin_layout Itemize
4548 \begin_layout Itemize
4554 \begin_layout Itemize
4560 \begin_layout Itemize
4566 \begin_layout Itemize
4572 \begin_layout Itemize
4578 \begin_layout Standard
4579 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4583 , rather than resetting it to
4588 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4589 \begin_inset space ~
4593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4595 reference "sec:Nesting"
4602 \begin_layout Subsection
4606 \begin_layout Standard
4607 The default paragraph environment is
4612 It creates a plain paragraph.
4613 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4614 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4615 this manual) are in the
4622 \begin_layout Standard
4623 You can nest a paragraph using the
4627 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4635 \begin_layout Subsection
4637 \begin_inset Index idx
4640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4649 \begin_layout Standard
4650 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
4652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4659 for thanks or contact information.
4660 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
4661 page along with today's date.
4662 For other types of documents, the title
4663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4670 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4674 \begin_layout Standard
4675 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4689 Here's how you use them:
4692 \begin_layout Itemize
4693 Put the title of your document in the
4700 \begin_layout Itemize
4701 Put the author name in the
4708 \begin_layout Itemize
4709 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4710 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4716 Note that using this environment is optional.
4717 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
4718 If you don't want a date, use the option
4720 Suppress default date on front page
4724 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4725 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4727 \begin_inset space ~
4735 \begin_layout Standard
4736 You can use footnotes to insert
4737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4744 or contact information.
4747 \begin_layout Subsection
4749 \begin_inset Index idx
4752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4759 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4768 \begin_layout Standard
4769 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4770 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
4773 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4775 \begin_inset Index idx
4778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4779 Section headings ! Numbered
4787 \begin_layout Standard
4788 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4792 \begin_layout Enumerate
4798 \begin_layout Enumerate
4804 \begin_layout Enumerate
4810 \begin_layout Enumerate
4816 \begin_layout Enumerate
4822 \begin_layout Enumerate
4828 \begin_layout Enumerate
4834 \begin_layout Standard
4835 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4836 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4837 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4840 \begin_layout Standard
4841 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4842 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4843 You group the book into chapters.
4844 LyX does a similar grouping:
4847 \begin_layout Itemize
4852 is divided into either
4863 \begin_layout Itemize
4875 \begin_layout Itemize
4887 \begin_layout Itemize
4899 \begin_layout Itemize
4911 \begin_layout Itemize
4923 \begin_layout Standard
4924 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4932 Not all document types use the
4936 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4941 is the top-level heading.
4949 \begin_layout Standard
4954 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
4955 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4957 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4969 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4971 \begin_inset Index idx
4974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4975 Section headings ! Unnumbered
4983 \begin_layout Standard
4984 The unnumbered section headings have a
4985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4992 at the end of their name.
4993 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
4994 the table of contents, see section
4995 \begin_inset space ~
4999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5008 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5009 Changing the Numbering
5010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5012 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
5019 \begin_layout Standard
5020 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5021 in the Table of Contents.
5022 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5024 Just as certain classes start with
5038 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5048 This is something you can change.
5051 \begin_layout Standard
5054 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5058 \begin_inset Index idx
5061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5070 \begin_inset space ~
5074 \begin_inset space ~
5079 you will see two counters.
5084 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
5086 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5090 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5091 Short Titles of Headings
5092 \begin_inset Index idx
5095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5096 Section headings ! Short titles
5102 \begin_inset Argument 1
5105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5112 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5114 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5121 \begin_layout Standard
5122 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5123 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5124 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5125 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5128 \begin_layout Standard
5129 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5130 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5131 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5132 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5135 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5137 \begin_inset space ~
5143 This will insert a box labeled
5144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5148 \begin_inset space ~
5152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5155 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5156 This also works for captions inside floats.
5157 There can only be one short title per title.
5160 \begin_layout Standard
5161 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5164 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5168 \begin_layout Standard
5169 The following information applies to all section headings:
5172 \begin_layout Itemize
5173 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5176 \begin_layout Itemize
5177 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5180 \begin_layout Itemize
5181 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5184 \begin_layout Itemize
5185 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5188 \begin_layout Subsection
5189 Quotes and Poetry line spacing
5192 \begin_layout Standard
5193 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5207 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5208 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5209 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5210 the text they contain.
5211 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5219 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5222 \begin_layout Standard
5223 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5232 when you start a new paragraph.
5233 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5237 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5238 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5239 have to change back to the
5243 environment yourself.
5246 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5256 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5263 \begin_inset Index idx
5266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5275 \begin_layout Standard
5276 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5277 time for the differences.
5286 are identical except for one difference:
5290 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5299 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5302 \begin_layout Standard
5303 Here's an example of the
5316 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5318 See – no indentation!
5322 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5323 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5324 the other paragraph.
5327 \begin_layout Standard
5328 Here's another example, this time in the
5335 \begin_layout Quotation
5341 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5342 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5343 the first line, then
5347 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5351 you were quoting other text.
5354 \begin_layout Quotation
5355 Here's a new paragraph.
5356 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5357 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5360 \begin_layout Standard
5361 As the examples show,
5365 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5366 They should put quotes in the
5371 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5375 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5378 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5384 \begin_inset Index idx
5387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5396 \begin_inset Index idx
5399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5406 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5415 \begin_layout Standard
5420 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5426 \begin_inset Newline newline
5429 Which I did not rehearse!
5433 It could be much worse.
5434 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5436 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5437 indented a bit more than the first.
5438 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5444 \begin_inset Newline newline
5447 And make things look fine
5448 \begin_inset Newline newline
5454 arg "newline-insert newline"
5460 \begin_layout Standard
5465 does not indent both margins.
5466 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5467 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the
5474 arg "newline-insert newline"
5480 \begin_layout Subsection
5482 \begin_inset Index idx
5485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5492 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5501 \begin_layout Standard
5502 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5512 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5521 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
5522 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5523 describing some general features of all four of them.
5526 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5530 \begin_layout Standard
5531 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5533 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
5542 reset the environment to
5546 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5547 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5548 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5552 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
5556 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5563 \begin_layout Standard
5564 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5565 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
5567 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5568 you read all of section
5569 \begin_inset space ~
5573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5575 reference "sec:Nesting"
5582 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5588 \begin_inset Index idx
5591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5607 \begin_layout Standard
5608 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5612 paragraph environment.
5613 It has the following properties:
5616 \begin_layout Itemize
5617 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5621 \begin_layout Itemize
5622 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5625 \begin_layout Itemize
5626 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5630 \begin_layout Itemize
5631 The items can have any length.
5632 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5633 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5640 \begin_layout Itemize
5645 environment inside another
5649 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5653 \begin_layout Itemize
5654 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5657 \begin_layout Itemize
5658 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
5661 \begin_layout Itemize
5663 \begin_inset space ~
5667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5669 reference "sec:Nesting"
5673 for a full explanation of nesting.
5677 \begin_layout Standard
5678 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5687 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5690 \begin_layout Standard
5691 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5692 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5695 \begin_layout Itemize
5696 The label for the first level
5700 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5704 \begin_layout Itemize
5705 The label for the second level is a dash.
5709 \begin_layout Itemize
5710 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5714 \begin_layout Itemize
5715 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5719 \begin_layout Itemize
5720 Back out to the third level.
5724 \begin_layout Itemize
5725 Back to the second level.
5729 \begin_layout Itemize
5730 Back to the outermost level.
5733 \begin_layout Standard
5734 These are the default labels for an
5739 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5741 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5744 dialog in the submenu
5749 \begin_inset Index idx
5752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5758 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
5761 \begin_layout Standard
5762 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5763 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5765 \begin_inset space ~
5769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5771 reference "sec:Nesting"
5778 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5784 \begin_inset Index idx
5787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5794 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5796 name "sec:Enumerate"
5803 \begin_layout Standard
5808 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5809 It has these properties:
5812 \begin_layout Enumerate
5813 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5817 \begin_layout Enumerate
5818 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5822 \begin_layout Enumerate
5823 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5826 \begin_layout Enumerate
5831 environment resets the counter to one.
5834 \begin_layout Enumerate
5847 \begin_layout Enumerate
5848 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5849 Items can have any length.
5852 \begin_layout Enumerate
5853 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5856 \begin_layout Enumerate
5857 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5860 \begin_layout Enumerate
5861 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5865 \begin_layout Standard
5874 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
5875 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
5882 \begin_layout Enumerate
5883 The first level of an
5887 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5891 \begin_layout Enumerate
5892 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5896 \begin_layout Enumerate
5897 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5901 \begin_layout Enumerate
5902 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5905 \begin_layout Enumerate
5906 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5911 \begin_layout Enumerate
5912 Back to the third level
5916 \begin_layout Enumerate
5917 Back to the second level.
5921 \begin_layout Enumerate
5922 Back to the outermost level.
5925 \begin_layout Standard
5926 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5930 environment, see section
5931 \begin_inset space ~
5935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5937 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
5942 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
5945 \begin_layout Standard
5946 There is more to nesting
5950 environments than we've stated here.
5951 You should read section
5952 \begin_inset space ~
5956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5958 reference "sec:Nesting"
5962 to learn more about nesting.
5965 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5971 \begin_inset Index idx
5974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5983 \begin_layout Standard
5984 Unlike the previous two environments, the
5988 list has no fixed label.
5989 Instead, LyX uses the first
5990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5997 of the first line as the label.
6001 \begin_layout Description
6002 Example: This is an example of the
6009 \begin_layout Standard
6010 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6014 \begin_layout Standard
6016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6023 it is meant that the first usage of the
6027 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6029 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6037 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
6042 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6043 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6045 \begin_inset space ~
6051 \begin_inset space ~
6055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6057 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
6061 for more information.) Here is an example:
6064 \begin_layout Description
6066 \begin_inset space ~
6069 Example: This one shows how to use a
6072 \begin_inset space ~
6084 \begin_layout Description
6085 Usage: You should use the
6089 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6090 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6092 It's not a good idea to use a
6096 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6097 You're better off using
6109 paragraphs into them.
6112 \begin_layout Description
6113 Nesting: You can nest
6117 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6121 \begin_layout Standard
6122 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6123 them from the first line.
6126 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6128 \begin_inset Index idx
6131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6140 \begin_layout Standard
6145 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
6148 \begin_layout Standard
6157 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6159 Here are its properties:
6162 \begin_layout Labeling
6163 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6165 \begin_inset space ~
6168 labels LyX uses the first
6169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6176 of each line as the item label.
6181 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6182 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6183 space as described above.
6186 \begin_layout Labeling
6187 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6188 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
6189 the body of the item text.
6190 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6191 label width plus a little extra space.
6195 \begin_layout Labeling
6196 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6198 \begin_inset space ~
6201 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
6203 If the label width is larger, the label
6204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6211 into the first line.
6212 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6213 margin of the rest of the item text.
6216 \begin_layout Labeling
6217 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6219 \begin_inset space ~
6222 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6227 environment has the same left margin.
6228 \begin_inset Newline newline
6231 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6234 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6236 \begin_inset space ~
6241 dialog (toolbar button
6244 arg "layout-paragraph"
6251 \begin_inset space ~
6256 determines the default label width.
6257 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6266 multiple times instead.
6267 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
6269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6276 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6279 \begin_inset space ~
6284 every time you alter a label in a
6289 \begin_inset Newline newline
6292 The predefined default width is the length of
6293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6301 \begin_inset space ~
6307 \begin_layout Standard
6312 list the same way as the
6316 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6322 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6326 \begin_layout Standard
6331 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6332 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6334 \begin_inset space ~
6338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6340 reference "sec:Nesting"
6344 to learn about nesting.
6347 \begin_layout Standard
6348 There is yet another feature of the
6352 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
6354 You can use additional
6358 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
6363 are documented in section
6364 \begin_inset space ~
6368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6370 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
6375 Here are some examples:
6378 \begin_layout Labeling
6379 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6380 Left The default for
6387 \begin_layout Labeling
6388 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6389 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6396 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6399 \begin_layout Labeling
6400 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6401 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6405 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6412 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6415 \begin_layout Subsection
6417 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6419 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
6424 \begin_inset Index idx
6427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6436 \begin_layout Standard
6437 The features described in this section require that the module
6439 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6441 is loaded in the document settings.
6442 The module uses the LaTeX-package
6447 \begin_inset Index idx
6450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6451 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6459 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6460 Custom Enumerate Lists
6461 \begin_inset Index idx
6464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6465 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6473 \begin_layout Standard
6475 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6478 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6481 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6482 There you add the command
6485 \begin_layout Standard
6493 \begin_layout Standard
6494 in TeX Code (shortcut
6504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6505 For more about TeX Code, look at section
6506 \begin_inset space ~
6510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6512 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6525 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6532 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6533 For capital Roman numerals replace
6545 in the command above.
6546 For Arabic numerals use
6554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6561 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6576 \begin_layout Standard
6578 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6586 You can only number 26
6587 \begin_inset space ~
6590 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6598 \begin_layout Standard
6599 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6600 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6603 \begin_layout Standard
6604 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6607 \begin_layout Enumerate
6608 \begin_inset Argument 1
6611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6637 \begin_layout Enumerate
6638 \begin_inset Argument 1
6641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6664 \begin_layout Enumerate
6669 \begin_layout Enumerate
6670 \begin_inset Argument 1
6673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6697 \begin_layout Enumerate
6698 \begin_inset Argument 1
6701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6727 \begin_layout Standard
6728 For this list these commands were used:
6731 \begin_layout Standard
6742 \begin_inset Newline newline
6750 \begin_inset Newline newline
6758 \begin_inset Newline newline
6768 \begin_layout Standard
6775 makes the label emphasized and
6784 \begin_layout Standard
6785 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6793 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6794 lists until you change the definition.
6802 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6804 \begin_inset Index idx
6807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6808 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6816 \begin_layout Standard
6817 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6820 \begin_layout Enumerate
6821 \begin_inset Argument 1
6824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6843 \begin_inset Note Note
6846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6847 goes back to default numbering
6855 \begin_layout Enumerate
6859 \begin_layout Standard
6863 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6867 \begin_layout Standard
6868 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6873 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
6874 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
6877 \begin_layout Standard
6878 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6886 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
6894 \begin_layout Standard
6895 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6897 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6898 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6899 of a normal enumeration.
6900 There, insert the command
6903 \begin_layout Standard
6909 \begin_layout Standard
6914 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6918 \begin_layout Enumerate
6922 \begin_layout Enumerate
6926 \begin_layout Standard
6927 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6930 \begin_layout Enumerate
6931 \begin_inset Argument 1
6934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6950 This enumeration starts at 4
6953 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6955 \begin_inset Index idx
6958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6967 \begin_layout Standard
6968 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
6970 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
6973 \begin_layout Itemize
6977 \begin_layout Itemize
6978 with standard spacing
6981 \begin_layout Standard
6982 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
6984 Add there the command
6988 to get no additional list space like in this example:
6991 \begin_layout Itemize
6992 \begin_inset Argument 1
6995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7014 \begin_layout Itemize
7018 \begin_layout Itemize
7022 \begin_layout Standard
7023 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
7029 \begin_inset Index idx
7032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7033 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7039 For more information see its documentation,
7040 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7049 \begin_layout Standard
7050 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7052 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7053 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7054 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7057 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7060 \begin_layout Enumerate
7061 \begin_inset Argument 1
7064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7072 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7085 \begin_layout Enumerate
7086 with negative indentation
7089 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7090 Further Customization
7091 \begin_inset Index idx
7094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7095 Lists ! Customization
7103 \begin_layout Standard
7104 You can also change the style of description lists.
7108 \begin_layout Standard
7114 \begin_layout Standard
7115 changes the description label font, the command
7118 \begin_layout Standard
7124 \begin_layout Standard
7125 sets the list style.
7128 \begin_layout Standard
7129 An example where the command
7132 \begin_layout Standard
7137 itshape, style=nextline
7140 \begin_layout Standard
7144 \begin_layout Description
7146 \begin_inset space ~
7150 \begin_inset Argument 1
7153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7159 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7161 itshape, style=nextline
7171 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7172 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7176 \begin_layout Description
7178 \begin_inset space ~
7181 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7182 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7183 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7186 \begin_layout Standard
7187 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
7193 \begin_inset Index idx
7196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7197 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7203 For more information see its documentation
7204 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7213 \begin_layout Subsection
7215 \begin_inset Index idx
7218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7227 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7235 \begin_inset space ~
7243 \begin_layout Standard
7244 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7252 \begin_inset space ~
7258 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7259 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
7260 In contrast, you can use the
7267 \begin_inset space ~
7272 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7273 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7277 \begin_layout Standard
7278 Of course, you're not limited to using
7285 \begin_inset space ~
7294 \begin_inset space ~
7299 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7300 some European academic papers.
7303 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7305 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7307 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7314 \begin_layout Standard
7319 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7320 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7324 \begin_inset space ~
7329 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7330 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7331 Here's an example of each:
7334 \begin_layout Right Address
7336 \begin_inset Newline newline
7340 \begin_inset Newline newline
7344 \begin_inset Newline newline
7347 When is it? What is today?
7350 \begin_layout Standard
7354 \begin_inset space ~
7360 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
7361 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7362 Here's an example of the
7369 \begin_layout Address
7371 \begin_inset Newline newline
7374 Where do I send this
7375 \begin_inset Newline newline
7378 Your post office and country
7381 \begin_layout Standard
7382 As you can see, both
7389 \begin_inset space ~
7394 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7399 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
7405 This makes sense, since
7413 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7414 Thus, you have to use
7421 arg "newline-insert newline"
7426 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7427 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7429 \begin_inset space ~
7433 \begin_inset space ~
7438 ) to start a new line in an
7445 \begin_inset space ~
7453 \begin_layout Subsection
7457 \begin_layout Standard
7458 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7459 or list of references.
7460 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7463 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7467 \begin_inset Index idx
7470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7479 \begin_layout Standard
7484 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7485 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7486 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7487 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7501 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7502 The book document classes ignores the
7506 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7510 in a letter document class.
7513 \begin_layout Standard
7518 environment does several things for you.
7519 First, it puts the centered label
7520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7528 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7530 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7531 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7532 the subsequent text.
7533 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
7534 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7538 \begin_layout Standard
7539 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7543 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7544 The new paragraph will still be in the
7549 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7550 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7553 \begin_layout Standard
7554 \begin_inset Float figure
7559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7561 \begin_inset Graphics
7562 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7570 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7573 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7575 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7596 \begin_layout Standard
7597 We would love to demonstrate the
7601 environment, but since this document is in the
7602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7609 class, we can't do this.
7610 We inserted it therefore as figure
7611 \begin_inset space ~
7615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7617 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7622 If you have never heard of an
7623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7630 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7633 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7639 \begin_inset Index idx
7642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7649 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7651 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
7658 \begin_layout Standard
7663 environment is used to list references.
7664 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7665 only use it at the end of the document.
7677 \begin_layout Standard
7678 When you first open a
7682 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7698 depending on the document class.
7699 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7700 Each paragraph of the
7704 environment is a bibliography entry.
7709 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7710 Each new paragraph is still in the
7717 \begin_layout Standard
7718 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7719 by using a BibTeX database.
7720 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
7721 phy handling, have a look at section
7722 \begin_inset space ~
7726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7728 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7735 \begin_layout Subsection
7739 \begin_inset Index idx
7742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7743 Paragraph ! LyX code
7749 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7758 \begin_layout Standard
7763 environment is another LyX extension.
7764 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7769 key as a fixed whitespace;
7773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7785 \begin_inset space ~
7790 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7795 this is the only case in which you can type multiple whitespaces in LyX.
7796 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7799 arg "newline-insert newline"
7816 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7817 So, when you finish using the
7821 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7822 Also, you can nest the
7826 environment inside of others.
7829 \begin_layout Standard
7830 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7833 \begin_layout Itemize
7837 arg "newline-insert newline"
7840 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7841 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7845 \begin_inset space \space{}
7855 arg "newline-insert newline"
7861 \begin_layout Itemize
7865 arg "newline-insert newline"
7876 \begin_layout Itemize
7881 to begin a new paragraph, then you can use a
7888 \begin_layout Itemize
7892 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
7899 \begin_layout Itemize
7900 You can't have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7901 You must put at least one
7905 in any line you want blank.
7906 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
7909 \begin_layout Itemize
7910 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7914 since that will insert
7919 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7922 arg "self-insert \""
7928 \begin_layout Standard
7932 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7936 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7940 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7944 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7948 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7949 printf("Hello World!
7954 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7958 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7962 \begin_layout Standard
7963 This is just the standard
7964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7975 \begin_layout Standard
7980 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts,
7981 rc-files, and so on.
7982 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
7983 as if you used a typewriter.
7984 \begin_inset Index idx
7987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7988 Paragraph environments|)
7993 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
7996 Program Code Listings
8001 \begin_inset space ~
8009 \begin_layout Section
8010 Nesting Environments
8011 \begin_inset Index idx
8014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8015 Nesting ! Environments
8021 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8030 \begin_layout Subsection
8034 \begin_layout Standard
8035 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
8037 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8039 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8041 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8053 \begin_layout Enumerate
8057 \begin_layout Enumerate
8062 \begin_layout Enumerate
8066 \begin_layout Enumerate
8071 \begin_layout Enumerate
8075 \begin_layout Standard
8076 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8077 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8079 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
8081 \begin_inset space ~
8085 \begin_inset space ~
8093 \begin_inset space ~
8097 \begin_inset space ~
8102 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8104 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8107 arg "depth-increment"
8113 arg "depth-decrement"
8127 arg "depth-increment"
8133 arg "depth-decrement"
8137 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8138 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8142 \begin_layout Standard
8143 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8144 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8145 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8146 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8149 \begin_layout Standard
8150 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8151 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
8153 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8156 \begin_layout Subsection
8157 What You Can and Can't Nest
8160 \begin_layout Standard
8161 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8162 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8165 \begin_layout Standard
8166 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8167 than a simple yes or no.
8168 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8171 \begin_layout Itemize
8172 Completely unnestable
8175 \begin_layout Itemize
8176 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8180 \begin_layout Itemize
8181 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8185 \begin_layout Standard
8186 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8187 environments have them:
8190 \begin_layout Description
8191 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8192 Can't nest into them.
8196 \begin_layout Itemize
8202 \begin_layout Itemize
8208 \begin_layout Itemize
8214 \begin_layout Itemize
8220 \begin_layout Itemize
8227 \begin_layout Description
8229 \begin_inset space ~
8232 Nestable You can nest them.
8233 You can nest other things into them.
8237 \begin_layout Itemize
8243 \begin_layout Itemize
8249 \begin_layout Itemize
8255 \begin_layout Itemize
8261 \begin_layout Itemize
8267 \begin_layout Itemize
8273 \begin_layout Itemize
8279 \begin_layout Itemize
8286 \begin_layout Description
8287 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8288 You can't nest anything into them.
8292 \begin_layout Itemize
8298 \begin_layout Itemize
8304 \begin_layout Itemize
8310 \begin_layout Itemize
8316 \begin_layout Itemize
8322 \begin_layout Itemize
8328 \begin_layout Itemize
8334 \begin_layout Itemize
8340 \begin_layout Itemize
8346 \begin_layout Itemize
8352 \begin_layout Itemize
8358 \begin_layout Itemize
8364 \begin_layout Itemize
8370 \begin_layout Itemize
8374 \begin_inset space ~
8380 \begin_layout Itemize
8387 \begin_layout Standard
8388 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8396 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8406 \begin_inset space ~
8409 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8410 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8411 nested section headings violate this.
8419 \begin_layout Subsection
8420 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8421 \begin_inset Index idx
8424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8425 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8433 \begin_layout Standard
8434 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8435 affected by nesting anyhow.
8439 \begin_layout Itemize
8443 \begin_layout Itemize
8447 \begin_layout Itemize
8451 \begin_layout Standard
8453 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8461 Figures and tables in
8465 are not affected by this.
8470 Have a look at section
8471 \begin_inset space ~
8475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8477 reference "sec:Floats"
8481 for more information about
8488 \begin_layout Standard
8489 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8490 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8494 \begin_layout Standard
8495 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8503 of its own, it behaves just like a
8504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8511 paragraph environment.
8512 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8516 \begin_layout Standard
8517 Here's an example with a table:
8520 \begin_layout Enumerate
8525 \begin_layout Enumerate
8526 This is (a) and it's nested.
8530 \begin_layout Standard
8531 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8537 \begin_layout Standard
8539 \begin_inset Tabular
8540 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8541 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8542 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8543 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8627 \begin_layout Standard
8628 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8635 \begin_layout Enumerate
8637 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8641 \begin_layout Enumerate
8645 \begin_layout Standard
8646 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8649 \begin_layout Enumerate
8654 \begin_layout Enumerate
8655 This is (a) and it's nested.
8659 \begin_layout Standard
8660 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8666 \begin_layout Standard
8668 \begin_inset Tabular
8669 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8670 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8671 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8672 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8756 \begin_layout Standard
8757 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8763 \begin_layout Enumerate
8770 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8773 \begin_layout Enumerate
8777 \begin_layout Standard
8778 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8782 \begin_layout Standard
8783 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8785 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8788 \begin_layout Enumerate
8793 \begin_layout Enumerate
8794 This is (a) and it's nested.
8797 \begin_layout Standard
8798 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8804 \begin_layout Standard
8806 \begin_inset Tabular
8807 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8808 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8809 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8810 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8895 \begin_layout Standard
8896 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8902 \begin_layout Enumerate
8904 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
8911 \begin_layout Enumerate
8915 \begin_layout Standard
8916 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
8922 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
8923 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
8927 \begin_layout Subsection
8928 Usage and General Features
8931 \begin_layout Standard
8932 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
8934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8941 is the innermost possible depth.
8942 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
8945 \begin_layout Enumerate
8946 level #1 – outermost
8950 \begin_layout Enumerate
8955 \begin_layout Enumerate
8960 \begin_layout Enumerate
8965 \begin_layout Itemize
8970 \begin_layout Itemize
8979 \begin_layout Standard
8980 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
8981 both of them in the example.
8982 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
8992 For example, if we tried to nest another
8997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9004 , we would get errors.
9007 \begin_layout Subsection
9009 \begin_inset Index idx
9012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9021 \begin_layout Standard
9022 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9023 We have several examples of nested environments.
9024 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9028 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9029 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9032 \begin_layout Labeling
9033 \labelwidthstring MMM
9034 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9043 \begin_layout Labeling
9044 \labelwidthstring MMM
9045 #2-a This is level #2.
9046 We created it by using
9049 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9055 arg "depth-increment"
9062 \begin_layout Labeling
9063 \labelwidthstring MMM
9064 #3-a This is level #3.
9065 This time, we just enter
9072 arg "depth-increment"
9076 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9080 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9086 arg "depth-increment"
9093 \begin_layout Standard
9098 environment, nested inside of
9099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9107 So, it's at level #4.
9108 We did this by entering
9111 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9117 arg "depth-increment"
9120 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9125 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9141 \begin_layout Standard
9146 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9149 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9155 \begin_layout Labeling
9156 \labelwidthstring MMM
9157 #4-a This is level #4.
9161 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9164 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9169 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9173 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9178 keep nesting things inside
9179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9190 \begin_layout Labeling
9191 \labelwidthstring MMM
9192 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9197 \begin_layout Labeling
9198 \labelwidthstring MMM
9199 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9200 and this is level #6.
9201 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9205 \begin_layout Labeling
9206 \labelwidthstring MMM
9207 #5-b Back to level #5.
9211 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9217 arg "depth-decrement"
9224 \begin_layout Labeling
9225 \labelwidthstring MMM
9229 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9235 arg "depth-decrement"
9238 , we're back at level #4.
9242 \begin_layout Labeling
9243 \labelwidthstring MMM
9244 #3-b Back to level #3.
9245 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9249 \begin_layout Labeling
9250 \labelwidthstring MMM
9251 #2-b Back to level #2.
9256 \begin_layout Labeling
9257 \labelwidthstring MMM
9258 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9259 After this sentence, we will enter
9263 and change the paragraph environment back to
9270 \begin_layout Standard
9271 We could have also used the
9287 environment in place of the
9292 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9295 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9296 Example 2: Inheritance
9299 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9300 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9303 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9312 arg "depth-increment"
9316 \begin_inset Newline newline
9319 which, we will change to the
9327 \begin_layout Enumerate
9332 environment, at level #2.
9335 \begin_layout Enumerate
9336 Notice how the nested
9340 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9344 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9348 \begin_layout Standard
9349 We ended this example by entering
9354 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9358 and reset the nesting depth by using
9361 arg "depth-decrement"
9367 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9368 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9377 \begin_inset Argument 1
9380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9381 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9389 \begin_layout Enumerate
9390 This is level #1, in an
9394 paragraph environment.
9395 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9399 \begin_layout Enumerate
9404 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9410 arg "depth-increment"
9414 Now, what happens if we nest an
9418 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9419 label be? An asterisk?
9423 \begin_layout Itemize
9433 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9434 So, its label is a bullet.
9435 (We got here by using
9438 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9444 arg "depth-increment"
9447 , then changing the environment to
9455 \begin_layout Itemize
9456 Here's level #4, produced using
9459 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9465 arg "depth-increment"
9469 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9474 \begin_layout Enumerate
9475 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9477 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9482 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9486 , because we are in the
9494 environment (that is, it is an
9509 \begin_layout Enumerate
9514 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9515 type of numbering does LyX use?
9518 \begin_layout Enumerate
9519 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9522 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9525 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9528 \begin_layout Enumerate
9532 arg "depth-decrement"
9535 to decrease the depth after the next
9538 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9545 \begin_layout Enumerate
9547 Look what type of label LyX is using!
9551 \begin_layout Enumerate
9553 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
9554 numeral as the label.Why?
9557 \begin_layout Enumerate
9558 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9567 Notice, however, that LyX
9571 reset the counter for the label.
9575 \begin_layout Enumerate
9579 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9585 arg "depth-decrement"
9588 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9589 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9590 into the twofold-nested
9598 \begin_layout Enumerate
9599 The same thing happens if we do another
9602 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9608 arg "depth-decrement"
9611 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9614 \begin_layout Standard
9615 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9620 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9634 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
9640 The same rule applies for the
9644 environment, as well.
9647 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9648 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9651 \begin_layout Enumerate
9652 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9653 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9654 the same detail with how we did it.
9663 \begin_layout Standard
9671 arg "depth-increment"
9678 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9679 the example in parentheses someplace.
9680 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9681 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9682 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9686 \begin_layout Enumerate
9691 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9696 Now we will add verse.
9697 \begin_inset Newline newline
9700 It will get much worse.
9701 \begin_inset Newline newline
9711 arg "depth-increment"
9722 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9723 \begin_inset Newline newline
9726 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9727 \begin_inset Newline newline
9733 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9746 \begin_layout Standard
9747 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9753 \begin_layout Standard
9755 \begin_inset Tabular
9756 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9757 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
9758 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9759 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
9802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9848 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9858 arg "depth-increment"
9864 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9874 arg "depth-decrement"
9881 \begin_layout Enumerate
9886 : level #1) This is another item.
9887 Note that selecting a
9891 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
9892 3 times to put the table inside the
9900 \begin_layout Quotation
9901 We're now ending the
9905 list and changing to
9910 We're still at level #1.
9911 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
9912 The next set of paragraphs is a
9913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9920 We will nest both the
9927 \begin_inset space ~
9932 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
9936 for the letter body.
9940 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9943 to preserve the depth.
9944 Remember that you need to use
9947 arg "newline-insert newline"
9950 to create multiple lines inside the
9957 \begin_inset space ~
9967 \begin_layout Right Address
9969 \begin_inset Newline newline
9972 Moosegroin, MT 00100
9973 \begin_inset Newline newline
9979 \begin_layout Address
9981 \begin_inset space ~
9987 \begin_layout Quotation
9988 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
9989 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9992 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
9993 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
9994 a backlog in our orders for methane.
9995 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
9996 as soon as possible.
9997 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10000 \begin_layout Quotation
10001 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10002 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10003 with your order, along with payment.
10006 \begin_layout Quotation
10007 We thank you again for your patience.
10010 \begin_layout Address
10012 \begin_inset Newline newline
10019 \begin_layout Quotation
10020 That ends that example!
10023 \begin_layout Standard
10024 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
10025 just a few keystrokes.
10026 We could have easily nested an
10047 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10050 \begin_layout Section
10051 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10052 \begin_inset Index idx
10055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10064 \begin_layout Standard
10065 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10066 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
10067 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10068 be broken at the end of a line.
10069 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10073 \begin_layout Subsection
10075 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10077 name "sub:Protected-Space"
10082 \begin_inset Index idx
10085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10094 \begin_layout Standard
10095 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
10096 line at that point.
10097 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10100 \begin_layout Quote
10101 Further documentation is given in section
10102 \begin_inset Newline newline
10106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10108 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10116 \begin_layout Standard
10117 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10132 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10141 A protected space is set with
10143 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10144 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10146 \begin_inset space ~
10154 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
10160 \begin_layout Subsection
10162 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10164 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
10169 \begin_inset Index idx
10172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10173 Spacing ! Horizontal
10181 \begin_layout Standard
10182 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10184 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10185 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10189 The length units are listed in Appendix
10190 \begin_inset space ~
10194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10196 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10203 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10207 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
10212 \begin_inset Index idx
10215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10216 Spaces ! Inter-word
10224 \begin_layout Standard
10225 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10226 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10227 at the ends of sentences.
10228 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
10229 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10230 followed by a period; see section
10231 \begin_inset space ~
10235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10237 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
10242 To insert a normal space, select
10244 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10245 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10247 \begin_inset space ~
10255 arg "space-insert normal"
10261 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10263 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10265 name "sub:Thin-Space"
10270 \begin_inset Index idx
10273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10282 \begin_layout Standard
10284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10291 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10300 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10301 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10302 inside abbreviations:
10305 \begin_layout Quote
10307 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10311 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10314 \begin_layout Standard
10315 or between values and units.
10316 Compare for example this:
10317 \begin_inset Newline newline
10321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10325 \begin_inset Newline newline
10328 10 kg (normal space
10331 \begin_layout Standard
10332 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10334 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10335 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10337 \begin_inset space ~
10345 arg "space-insert thin"
10351 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10355 \begin_layout Standard
10356 You can also insert the following space types:
10359 \begin_layout Description
10361 \begin_inset space ~
10365 \begin_inset space ~
10368 space A line with a
10369 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10373 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10377 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10380 negative thin space between the arrows.
10383 \begin_layout Description
10385 \begin_inset space ~
10389 \begin_inset space ~
10392 space A line with a
10393 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10397 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10401 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10404 negative medium space between the arrows.
10407 \begin_layout Description
10409 \begin_inset space ~
10413 \begin_inset space ~
10416 space A line with a
10417 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10421 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10425 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10428 negative thick space between the arrows.
10431 \begin_layout Description
10433 \begin_inset space ~
10437 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10441 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10445 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10449 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10453 \begin_inset space ~
10457 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10460 em) space between the arrows.
10463 \begin_layout Description
10465 \begin_inset space ~
10469 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10473 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10477 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10481 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10485 \begin_inset space ~
10489 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10492 em) space between the arrows.
10495 \begin_layout Description
10497 \begin_inset space ~
10501 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10505 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10509 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10513 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10517 \begin_inset space ~
10521 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10524 em) space between the arrows.
10527 \begin_layout Description
10529 \begin_inset space ~
10533 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10537 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10542 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10546 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10549 cm space between the arrows.
10552 \begin_layout Standard
10554 \begin_inset space ~
10558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10560 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10564 lists the different space sizes.
10567 \begin_layout Standard
10568 \begin_inset Float table
10573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10574 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10577 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10579 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10583 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10593 \begin_inset Tabular
10594 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10595 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
10596 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10597 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10637 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10661 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10685 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10709 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10713 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
10717 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10741 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10765 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10780 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10793 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10808 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10821 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10836 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10849 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10870 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10876 \begin_inset Index idx
10879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10888 \begin_layout Standard
10889 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
10890 in a uniform fashion.
10891 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
10892 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
10893 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
10894 equally between themselves.
10897 \begin_layout Standard
10898 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
10901 \begin_layout Quote
10903 This is on the left side
10904 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10907 This is on the right
10910 \begin_layout Quote
10913 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10917 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10923 \begin_layout Quote
10926 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10930 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10934 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10940 \begin_layout Standard
10941 That was an example in the
10947 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10951 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10955 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10958 is one in a standard paragraph.
10959 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
10963 sitting in-between the two arrows.
10966 \begin_layout Standard
10967 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
10970 \begin_inset space ~
10975 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
10978 \begin_layout Standard
10980 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
10984 \begin_inset space ~
10990 \begin_layout Standard
10992 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
10996 \begin_inset space ~
11002 \begin_layout Standard
11004 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11008 \begin_inset space ~
11014 \begin_layout Standard
11016 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11020 \begin_inset space ~
11026 \begin_layout Standard
11028 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11032 \begin_inset space ~
11038 \begin_layout Standard
11040 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11044 \begin_inset space ~
11050 \begin_layout Standard
11051 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11059 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11063 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
11064 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11065 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11069 option in the space dialog.
11077 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11079 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11081 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
11086 \begin_inset Index idx
11089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11098 \begin_layout Standard
11099 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11100 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11103 \begin_layout Standard
11104 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11107 What is correct English?:
11108 \begin_inset Newline newline
11112 \begin_inset Newline newline
11116 \begin_inset space ~
11119 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11120 \begin_inset Newline newline
11124 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11135 \begin_inset Newline newline
11139 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11150 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11156 \begin_layout Standard
11158 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11163 \begin_inset space ~
11167 \begin_inset space ~
11171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11175 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11177 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11178 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11182 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11188 \begin_inset space ~
11192 \begin_inset space ~
11196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11199 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11208 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11209 That is why it is named
11210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11218 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11219 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11223 \begin_layout Subsection
11225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11227 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
11232 \begin_inset Index idx
11235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11244 \begin_layout Standard
11245 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11247 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11248 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11250 \begin_inset space ~
11256 There you find the following sizes:
11259 \begin_layout Standard
11272 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11277 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11279 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11280 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11282 \begin_inset space ~
11288 \begin_inset Index idx
11291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11292 Document ! Settings
11297 for the paragraph separation.
11298 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11309 \begin_layout Standard
11315 \begin_inset Index idx
11318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11324 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11325 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11330 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11331 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11340 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11349 s are described in section
11350 \begin_inset space ~
11354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11356 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
11365 If there are several
11369 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11370 You can therefore use
11374 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11377 \begin_layout Standard
11382 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11383 \begin_inset space ~
11387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11389 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11396 \begin_layout Standard
11397 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11407 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11408 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11420 \begin_layout Subsection
11421 Paragraph Alignment
11422 \begin_inset Index idx
11425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11426 Paragraph ! Alignment
11434 \begin_layout Standard
11435 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11437 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11440 dialog (toolbar button
11443 arg "layout-paragraph"
11447 There are five possibilities:
11450 \begin_layout Itemize
11458 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11464 \begin_layout Itemize
11472 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11478 \begin_layout Itemize
11486 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11492 \begin_layout Itemize
11500 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11506 \begin_layout Itemize
11514 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11520 \begin_layout Standard
11521 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11522 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11523 the left and right margins.
11524 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11527 \begin_layout Standard
11529 This paragraph is right aligned,
11532 \begin_layout Standard
11534 this one is centered,
11537 \begin_layout Standard
11539 this one is left aligned.
11542 \begin_layout Subsection
11544 \begin_inset Index idx
11547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11548 Page breaks ! Forced
11554 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11556 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11563 \begin_layout Standard
11564 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
11565 can force a page break where you want one.
11566 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
11567 Only if you use a lot of
11571 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11574 \begin_layout Standard
11575 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11576 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11580 have to change the page breaking.
11583 \begin_layout Standard
11584 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11586 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11588 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11589 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11591 \begin_inset space ~
11597 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11599 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11600 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11602 \begin_inset space ~
11607 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11609 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11610 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11613 \begin_layout Standard
11614 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11615 at the top of a page.
11616 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11617 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11618 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11619 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11623 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11627 to learn more about
11634 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11636 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11638 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11643 \begin_inset Index idx
11646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11647 Page breaks ! Clear
11655 \begin_layout Standard
11656 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11657 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11658 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11659 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11660 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11663 \begin_layout Standard
11664 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11666 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11667 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11669 \begin_inset space ~
11675 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11677 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11678 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11680 \begin_inset space ~
11684 \begin_inset space ~
11689 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11690 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11693 \begin_layout Subsection
11695 \begin_inset Index idx
11698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11705 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11707 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11714 \begin_layout Standard
11715 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
11717 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11719 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11720 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11722 \begin_inset space ~
11726 \begin_inset space ~
11734 arg "newline-insert newline"
11738 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11740 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11741 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11743 \begin_inset space ~
11747 \begin_inset space ~
11755 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
11758 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11760 This is useful to avoid
11761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11768 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11771 \begin_layout Standard
11772 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
11773 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
11774 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
11775 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
11776 \begin_inset space ~
11780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11782 reference "sec:Quote"
11787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11789 reference "sec:Verse"
11794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11796 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
11803 \begin_layout Subsection
11805 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11807 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
11812 \begin_inset Index idx
11815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11824 \begin_layout Standard
11826 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11837 \begin_layout Standard
11841 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11842 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11844 \begin_inset space ~
11849 you can insert horizontal lines.
11850 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
11851 of the current text line or the paragraph.
11852 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
11855 \begin_layout Standard
11857 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11868 \begin_layout Section
11869 Characters and Symbols
11872 \begin_layout Standard
11873 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
11874 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
11875 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
11877 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11883 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
11887 for information on how this is done.
11890 \begin_layout Standard
11891 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
11896 dialog via the menu
11898 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11899 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11905 \begin_layout Standard
11906 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11914 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
11915 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
11916 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
11924 \begin_layout Section
11925 Fonts and Text Styles
11926 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11928 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
11935 \begin_layout Subsection
11937 \begin_inset Index idx
11940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11949 \begin_layout Standard
11950 There are two types of fonts:
11953 \begin_layout Description
11955 \begin_inset space ~
11959 \begin_inset Index idx
11962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11968 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
11969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11973 characters) in the font.
11974 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
11975 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
11976 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
11977 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
11978 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
11979 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
11980 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
11981 \begin_inset Newline newline
11984 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
11985 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
11986 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
11987 sizes than at small ones.
11988 \begin_inset Newline newline
12002 \begin_inset space ~
12010 \begin_layout Description
12012 \begin_inset space ~
12016 \begin_inset Index idx
12019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12025 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12026 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12027 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12028 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12029 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12030 image manipulation program.
12031 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12032 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12033 \begin_inset space ~
12036 pixels high up to 34
12037 \begin_inset space ~
12040 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12041 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12042 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12044 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12045 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12046 \begin_inset Newline newline
12049 Bitmap fonts are named
12052 \begin_inset space ~
12057 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12060 \begin_layout Standard
12061 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12062 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12063 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12064 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12065 use scalable fonts.
12068 \begin_layout Standard
12069 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12072 \begin_layout Standard
12073 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12074 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12075 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12076 font to emphasize text, you use an
12077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12085 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
12086 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12090 \begin_layout Subsection
12092 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12094 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12101 \begin_layout Standard
12102 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
12103 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12104 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
12106 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
12107 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12108 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12109 to a word processor.
12110 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12111 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
12112 across different machines.
12113 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
12114 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12116 In LyX, only a subset of these are directly selectable via the user interface
12118 \begin_inset space ~
12122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12124 reference "sub:Document-Font"
12129 However, all the others are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code
12130 in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired
12134 \begin_layout Standard
12135 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
12136 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
12138 Both engines are supported by LyX.
12139 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12140 that is installed on your system.
12141 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12144 \begin_layout Standard
12145 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12153 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12154 es; so you might have to experiment.
12162 \begin_layout Standard
12163 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12171 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
12172 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
12180 \begin_layout Subsection
12181 Document Font and Font size
12182 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12184 name "sub:Document-Font"
12189 \begin_inset Index idx
12192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12199 \begin_inset Index idx
12202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12211 \begin_layout Standard
12212 You can set the document fonts in the
12214 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12218 \begin_inset Index idx
12221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12222 Document ! Settings
12232 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12233 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12236 \begin_inset space ~
12245 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12246 for (some) sans serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit
12247 with the roman font.
12250 \begin_layout Standard
12257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12266 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12267 This requires that you use
12273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12312 as the output format, i.
12313 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12317 \begin_inset space \space{}
12320 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
12321 \begin_inset space ~
12325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12327 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12332 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
12333 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
12335 \begin_inset space ~
12338 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
12339 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12340 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
12342 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12345 \begin_layout Standard
12346 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
12351 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
12356 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12357 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
12358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12364 \begin_inset space ~
12370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12383 European Computer Modern
12386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12393 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12396 \begin_layout Standard
12405 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12406 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12411 This problem doesn't appear if you read PDFs in
12414 \begin_inset space ~
12419 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12425 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12426 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12429 \begin_layout Itemize
12433 \begin_inset space ~
12438 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12451 \begin_inset space ~
12456 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
12460 as the default font.
12461 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12462 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12465 \begin_inset space ~
12478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12479 One difference is improved kerning.
12487 \begin_layout Itemize
12491 \begin_inset space ~
12495 \begin_inset space ~
12500 fonts in (the rare) case that
12503 \begin_inset space ~
12508 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12523 Virtual means that it
12524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12535 -glyphs from other fonts.
12536 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12558 Loading the LaTeX-package
12563 \begin_inset Index idx
12566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12567 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
12572 with the document preamble line
12573 \begin_inset Newline newline
12580 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12581 \begin_inset Newline newline
12586 will fix the guillemet problem.
12591 and that accented characters are not
12595 glyph, but built of
12599 characters, the accent and the letter.
12600 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12606 If you search for example for the French word
12607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12614 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12623 and not for the glyph
12624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12628 \begin_inset space ~
12632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12638 \begin_layout Itemize
12639 If you do not like the look of
12647 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12648 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12652 \begin_inset space ~
12658 \begin_inset space ~
12668 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12669 \begin_inset space ~
12672 serif and typewriter fonts,
12676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12677 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12678 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12684 \begin_inset space ~
12693 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12694 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12698 \begin_inset space \space{}
12706 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12710 \begin_inset space \space{}
12716 \begin_inset space ~
12724 \begin_inset space ~
12734 but you can also select your own.
12735 \begin_inset Newline newline
12738 The differences between roman,
12741 \begin_inset space ~
12750 fonts are explained in section
12751 \begin_inset space ~
12755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12757 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12762 \begin_inset Newline newline
12768 \begin_inset space ~
12773 was originally designed for newspapers.
12774 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
12775 into the small newspaper columns.
12779 \begin_inset space ~
12784 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12787 \begin_layout Standard
12788 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
12801 Some classes provide additional sizes.
12806 depends on the class you are using.
12807 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
12810 \begin_layout Standard
12811 Note that the font size is the
12816 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
12817 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12818 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12821 \begin_inset space ~
12827 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12828 \begin_inset space ~
12832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12834 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12841 \begin_layout Standard
12845 \begin_inset space ~
12850 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
12852 \begin_inset space ~
12855 serif or typewriter.
12860 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
12870 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
12873 \begin_layout Standard
12882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12891 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
12897 \begin_inset Index idx
12900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12901 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
12907 \begin_inset space ~
12911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12913 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
12918 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
12919 Unless you have specific reasons, use
12926 \begin_layout Standard
12927 With some fonts, the checkboxes
12929 Use Old Style Figures
12933 Use True Small Caps
12936 These are extra features some fonts provide.
12939 Use Old Style Figures
12941 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
12943 Old style figures are the numerals (0
12944 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12948 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12951 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
12955 Use True Small Caps
12957 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
12958 of scaled capitals.
12959 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
12960 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
12963 \begin_layout Standard
12968 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
12969 a font to display the script characters.
12973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12974 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
12979 \begin_inset Index idx
12982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12983 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
12988 So this has no effect for the document language
13002 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13006 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13014 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
13018 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13019 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13020 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13022 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13025 dialog, see section
13026 \begin_inset space ~
13030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13032 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
13044 \begin_layout Subsection
13045 Using Different Character Styles
13046 \begin_inset Index idx
13049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13056 \begin_inset Index idx
13059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13068 \begin_layout Standard
13069 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
13070 certain paragraph environments.
13071 LyX supports two character styles,
13080 You can activate both of these styles via keybindings, the menus, and the
13084 \begin_layout Standard
13089 style, do one of the following:
13092 \begin_layout Itemize
13093 click on the toolbar button
13102 \begin_layout Itemize
13103 use the key binding
13112 \begin_layout Standard
13113 These commands are all toggles.
13118 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13121 \begin_layout Standard
13122 One typically uses the
13126 style for proper names.
13128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13135 is the original author of LyX.
13136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13142 \begin_layout Standard
13143 A more widely used character style is the
13148 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13155 \begin_layout Itemize
13156 clicking on the toolbar button
13165 \begin_layout Itemize
13166 using the keybindings
13175 \begin_layout Standard
13180 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
13181 es use a different font.
13184 \begin_layout Standard
13185 We've been using the
13189 style all over the place in this document.
13190 Here's one more example:
13193 \begin_layout Quotation
13196 Do not overuse character styles!
13199 \begin_layout Standard
13200 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13201 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13202 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13203 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13207 \begin_layout Standard
13208 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13216 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13218 \begin_inset space ~
13221 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13227 arg "dialog-show character"
13233 \begin_layout Subsection
13234 Fine-Tuning with the
13239 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13241 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13246 \begin_inset Index idx
13249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13258 \begin_layout Standard
13259 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13260 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13261 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13262 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13263 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13264 from ordinary dialog.
13267 \begin_layout Standard
13268 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13269 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13270 \begin_inset Newline newline
13273 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13274 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13277 \begin_layout Standard
13278 To use custom character styles, open the
13280 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13282 \begin_inset space ~
13285 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13288 dialog or press the toolbar button
13291 arg "dialog-show character"
13295 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13296 font property that you can choose.
13297 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13300 \begin_inset space ~
13305 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13310 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13311 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13312 environments all at once.
13315 \begin_layout Standard
13316 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13319 \begin_inset space ~
13331 \begin_layout Labeling
13332 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13346 The possible options are:
13350 \begin_layout Labeling
13351 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13356 This is the Roman font family.
13357 Normally a serif font.
13358 It's also the default family.
13368 \begin_layout Labeling
13369 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13373 \begin_inset space ~
13380 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13392 \begin_layout Labeling
13393 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13400 This is the Typewriter font family.
13406 arg "font-typewriter"
13415 \begin_layout Labeling
13416 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13421 This corresponds to the print weight.
13426 \begin_layout Labeling
13427 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13432 This is the Medium font series.
13433 It's also the default series.
13436 \begin_layout Labeling
13437 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13444 This is the Bold font series.
13457 \begin_layout Labeling
13458 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13463 As the name implies.
13468 \begin_layout Labeling
13469 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13474 This is the Upright font shape.
13475 It's also the default shape.
13478 \begin_layout Labeling
13479 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13493 s the Italic font shape
13499 \begin_layout Labeling
13500 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13507 This is the Slanted font shape
13509 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
13512 \begin_layout Labeling
13513 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13517 \begin_inset space ~
13524 This is the Small caps font shape
13531 \begin_layout Labeling
13532 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13537 Alters the text color.
13538 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13542 \begin_inset space ~
13547 , which means that the document default color set in
13549 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13550 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13556 \begin_inset space ~
13561 is used, you can choose between
13594 \begin_inset Index idx
13597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13606 \begin_layout Labeling
13607 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13612 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
13613 the language of the document.
13614 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
13616 \begin_inset Newline newline
13619 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
13620 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
13621 When using the spell checking (see section
13622 \begin_inset space ~
13626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13628 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
13632 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
13635 \begin_layout Labeling
13636 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13641 Alters the size of the font.
13642 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
13643 proportional to the document font size.
13644 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
13645 what you want to do.
13650 \begin_layout Labeling
13651 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13672 arg "font-size tiny"
13678 \begin_layout Labeling
13679 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13700 arg "font-size scriptsize"
13706 \begin_layout Labeling
13707 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13728 arg "font-size footnotesize"
13734 \begin_layout Labeling
13735 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13756 arg "font-size small"
13762 \begin_layout Labeling
13763 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13777 It's also the default size.
13781 arg "font-size normal"
13787 \begin_layout Labeling
13788 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13809 arg "font-size large"
13815 \begin_layout Labeling
13816 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13837 arg "font-size larger"
13843 \begin_layout Labeling
13844 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13865 arg "font-size largest"
13871 \begin_layout Labeling
13872 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13893 arg "font-size huge"
13899 \begin_layout Labeling
13900 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13921 arg "font-size giant"
13927 \begin_layout Labeling
13928 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13933 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
13934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13953 arg "font-size increase"
13959 \begin_layout Labeling
13960 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13965 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
13966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13985 arg "font-size decrease"
13992 \begin_layout Standard
13997 : don't go crazy with this feature.
13998 You should almost never need to change the font size.
13999 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14000 — use those instead.
14001 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14004 \begin_layout Labeling
14005 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14010 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14015 \begin_layout Labeling
14016 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14023 This is text with emphasize on
14026 This might seem like the same as
14030 , but it is actually a bit different.
14036 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14038 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14041 \begin_layout Labeling
14042 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14049 This is text with Underbar on.
14055 arg "font-underline"
14061 \begin_inset Newline newline
14066 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14067 when you could not change fonts.
14068 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14069 This is only possible in LyX because some people
14073 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14076 \begin_layout Labeling
14077 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14081 \begin_inset space ~
14088 This is text with Double underbar on.
14094 arg "font-underunderline"
14098 \begin_inset Newline newline
14101 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14102 about double underbar.
14105 \begin_layout Labeling
14106 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14110 \begin_inset space ~
14117 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14123 arg "font-underwave"
14127 \begin_inset Newline newline
14130 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14131 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14134 \begin_layout Labeling
14135 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14142 This is text with Strikeout on.
14148 arg "font-strikeout"
14152 \begin_inset Newline newline
14155 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14156 changed in the meantime.
14159 \begin_layout Labeling
14160 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14167 This is text with Noun on.
14174 , this is a logical attribute.
14175 Normally it's equivalent to
14178 \begin_inset space ~
14187 \begin_layout Standard
14188 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14189 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14191 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14193 \begin_inset space ~
14196 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14202 arg "dialog-show character"
14205 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14206 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14209 arg "textstyle-apply"
14213 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14217 \begin_layout Standard
14218 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14225 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14226 (suppose you just set the shape to
14227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14245 \begin_inset space ~
14257 \begin_layout Standard
14258 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14266 \begin_inset space ~
14278 \begin_layout Itemize
14284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14291 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14309 \begin_inset Newline newline
14313 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14327 \begin_inset Note Note
14330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14331 For more on phantoms see section
14332 \begin_inset space ~
14336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14338 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
14348 \begin_inset Newline newline
14354 \begin_layout Itemize
14359 fonts use characters with serifs.
14360 These are the small
14361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14368 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14369 The following example shows the difference:
14370 \begin_inset Newline newline
14374 \begin_inset Newline newline
14379 text without serifs
14382 \begin_inset Newline newline
14385 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14386 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14393 \begin_layout Itemize
14398 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14399 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14400 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14403 \begin_layout Standard
14404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14411 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14412 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14415 \begin_inset space ~
14420 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14421 the property to be removed.
14422 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14423 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14424 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14442 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14443 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14451 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14455 \begin_inset space ~
14460 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14471 If you, for example, set
14472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14490 \begin_inset space ~
14495 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14504 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14507 \begin_layout Standard
14508 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14509 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14512 \begin_layout Section
14513 Printing and Previewing
14516 \begin_layout Subsection
14520 \begin_layout Standard
14521 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14522 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14523 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14524 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14525 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14527 Additional Features
14532 \begin_layout Standard
14533 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
14534 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
14535 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
14536 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
14537 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
14538 This happens in two stages:
14541 \begin_layout Enumerate
14542 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
14543 generating a file with the extension,
14544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14558 \begin_layout Enumerate
14559 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
14563 file to produce printable output.
14566 \begin_layout Subsection
14567 Output file formats
14568 \begin_inset Index idx
14571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14578 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14580 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
14587 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14588 Simple text (ASCII)
14589 \begin_inset Index idx
14592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14593 File formats ! ASCII
14601 \begin_layout Standard
14602 This file type has the extension
14603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14615 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14619 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14626 \begin_layout Standard
14627 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
14629 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14630 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14632 \begin_inset space ~
14638 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
14639 a BibTeX bibliography (section
14640 \begin_inset space ~
14644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14646 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
14651 If your document includes such material, use
14653 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14654 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14656 \begin_inset space ~
14660 \begin_inset space ~
14664 \begin_inset space ~
14672 \begin_inset space ~
14676 \begin_inset space ~
14682 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
14683 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
14686 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14688 \begin_inset Index idx
14691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14692 File formats ! LaTeX
14700 \begin_layout Standard
14701 This file type has the extension
14702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14713 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
14715 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
14716 it manually with console commands.
14717 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
14718 you view or export your document.
14721 \begin_layout Standard
14722 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
14724 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14725 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14740 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
14741 \begin_inset space ~
14745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14747 reference "sub:Export"
14754 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14756 \begin_inset Index idx
14759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14768 \begin_layout Standard
14769 This file type has the extension
14770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14790 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
14791 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
14792 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
14796 \begin_layout Standard
14797 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
14798 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
14799 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
14800 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
14801 when you view the DVI.
14802 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
14805 \begin_layout Standard
14806 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
14808 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14809 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14814 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14815 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14817 \begin_inset space ~
14824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14834 The latter option uses the program
14843 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
14844 font access (see section
14845 \begin_inset space ~
14849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14851 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14856 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
14857 standard TeX processor.
14860 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14862 \begin_inset Index idx
14865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14866 File formats ! PostScript
14874 \begin_layout Standard
14875 This file type has the extension
14876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14888 PostScript was developed by the company
14892 as a printer language.
14893 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
14895 PostScript can be seen as a
14896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14899 programming language
14900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14903 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
14907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14908 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack
14914 \begin_inset Index idx
14917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14918 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
14928 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
14931 \begin_layout Standard
14932 PostScript can only contain images in the format
14933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14936 Encapsulated PostScript
14937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14940 (EPS, file extension
14941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14953 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
14954 to convert them in the background to EPS.
14955 If, for example, you have 50
14956 \begin_inset space ~
14959 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
14960 \begin_inset space ~
14963 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
14964 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
14965 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
14966 EPS to avoid this problem.
14969 \begin_layout Standard
14970 You can export to PostScript using the menu
14972 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14973 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14979 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14981 \begin_inset Index idx
14984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14991 \begin_inset Index idx
14994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15003 \begin_layout Standard
15004 This file type has the extension
15005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15021 Portable Document Format
15022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15029 was derived from PostScript.
15030 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15039 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15040 looks exactly the same.
15043 \begin_layout Standard
15044 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15048 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15052 (JPG, file extension
15053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15080 Portable Network Graphics
15081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15084 (PNG, file extension
15085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15097 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
15098 background to one of these formats.
15099 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15100 will slow down your workflow.
15101 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15104 \begin_layout Standard
15105 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15107 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15113 \begin_layout Description
15115 \begin_inset space ~
15118 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15122 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15125 \begin_layout Description
15127 \begin_inset space ~
15134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15141 X) This uses the program
15145 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15150 is a new engine, derived from
15154 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15155 access (see section
15156 \begin_inset space ~
15160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15162 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15167 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15168 standard TeX processor.
15171 \begin_layout Description
15173 \begin_inset space ~
15180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15187 X) This uses the program
15191 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15196 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15197 font access (see section
15198 \begin_inset space ~
15202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15204 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15209 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15210 vertically written Japanese.
15213 \begin_layout Description
15215 \begin_inset space ~
15218 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15222 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15226 \begin_layout Description
15228 \begin_inset space ~
15231 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15235 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15236 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15240 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15241 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15244 \begin_layout Standard
15248 \begin_inset space ~
15257 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15258 works without problems.
15259 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
15260 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15264 \begin_inset space ~
15271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15283 \begin_inset space ~
15290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15299 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15307 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15309 \begin_inset Index idx
15312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15313 FileFormats ! XHTML
15319 \begin_inset Index idx
15322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15331 \begin_layout Standard
15332 This file type has the extension
15333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15345 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15346 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15347 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15348 suitable for the purpose.
15349 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15351 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15352 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15355 between different formats, which are described in section
15357 Math Output in XHTML
15362 \begin_inset space ~
15370 \begin_layout Standard
15371 XHTML output remains
15372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15379 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
15382 LyX and the World Wide Web
15386 Additional Features
15388 manual, for more information.
15391 \begin_layout Standard
15392 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15394 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15395 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15401 \begin_layout Subsection
15403 \begin_inset Index idx
15406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15415 \begin_layout Standard
15416 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15417 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15426 or use the toolbar button
15433 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15434 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15435 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15441 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15445 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15447 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15453 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15458 Further output formats can be selected via
15460 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15461 View (Other Formats)
15463 or the toolbar button
15464 \begin_inset Graphics
15465 filename ../images/view-others.png
15467 groupId toolbarbuttons
15474 \begin_layout Standard
15475 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15476 viewer window using the menu
15478 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15483 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15484 Update (Other Formats)
15489 \begin_layout Standard
15490 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
15492 To have a real output, export your document.
15495 \begin_layout Subsection
15496 Printing the File from within LyX
15497 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15499 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
15506 \begin_layout Standard
15507 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
15508 it directly from within LyX.
15509 To print a file, select the menu
15511 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15517 arg "dialog-show print"
15520 ) or click on the toolbar button
15523 arg "dialog-show print"
15527 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
15528 This file is then processed by the program
15532 to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
15537 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
15540 \begin_layout Standard
15541 You can set the following print parameters in the
15544 \begin_inset space ~
15552 \begin_layout Labeling
15553 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15558 This is the name of the printer to print to.
15562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15563 Note that this printer name is for the program
15572 has to be configured for this printer name.
15573 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
15574 \begin_inset space ~
15578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15580 reference "sub:Printer"
15589 The printer should understand PostScript.
15592 \begin_layout Labeling
15593 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15598 The name of a file to print to.
15599 The output will be a PostScript file.
15600 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
15604 \begin_layout Standard
15605 You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only
15606 odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options
15607 are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer:
15608 you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side.
15609 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
15610 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
15611 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
15614 \begin_layout Section
15615 A few Words about Typography
15616 \begin_inset Index idx
15619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15628 \begin_layout Subsection
15629 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15630 \begin_inset Index idx
15633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15640 \begin_inset Index idx
15643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15652 \begin_layout Standard
15654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15665 character comes in four lengths: the
15677 , and the minus sign:
15678 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15684 \begin_layout Standard
15685 \begin_inset Tabular
15686 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
15687 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
15688 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15689 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15690 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15691 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15720 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15760 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15785 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15787 \begin_inset space ~
15790 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15797 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15822 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15824 \begin_inset space ~
15827 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15848 \begin_inset Formula $-$
15856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15882 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15888 \begin_layout Standard
15889 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
15890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15901 character multiple times in a row.
15902 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
15903 the final output, but not in LyX.
15905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15909 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15921 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15925 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15935 \begin_layout Standard
15936 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
15937 math mode and has a length of its own.
15938 Here are some examples:
15941 \begin_layout Enumerate
15942 line- and page-breaks
15943 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15953 \begin_layout Enumerate
15955 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15965 \begin_layout Enumerate
15966 Oh — there's a dash.
15967 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15977 \begin_layout Enumerate
15978 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
15982 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15992 \begin_layout Subsection
15994 \begin_inset Index idx
15997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16004 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16006 name "sub:Hyphenation"
16013 \begin_layout Standard
16014 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
16015 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
16020 \begin_inset Index idx
16023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16024 LaTeX-packages ! babel
16029 following the rules of the document language.
16032 \begin_layout Standard
16033 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16038 font and with unusual constructs, like
16039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16047 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
16049 This is done with the menu
16051 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16052 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16054 \begin_inset space ~
16060 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
16061 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
16064 \begin_layout Standard
16065 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16066 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16076 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
16077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16084 as a hyphenation possibility.
16085 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16086 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16087 as described in section
16088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16091 Prevent Hyphenation
16092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16098 \begin_inset space ~
16106 \begin_layout Subsection
16108 \begin_inset Index idx
16111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16120 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16121 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16122 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16124 name "sub:Abbreviations"
16131 \begin_layout Standard
16132 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
16133 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16134 LaTeX then adds the
16135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16138 appropriate amount of space.
16139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16142 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16144 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16145 gets after another word.
16148 \begin_layout Standard
16149 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16150 not work in all cases.
16152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16163 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16164 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16167 \begin_layout Standard
16168 Here are some examples of
16172 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16175 \begin_layout Itemize
16180 \begin_layout Itemize
16185 \begin_layout Standard
16186 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16189 \begin_layout Itemize
16191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16195 this is too much space!
16198 \begin_layout Itemize
16203 \begin_layout Standard
16204 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16207 \begin_layout Standard
16208 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16211 \begin_layout Enumerate
16215 \begin_inset space ~
16220 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16221 \begin_inset space ~
16225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16227 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
16232 \begin_inset Index idx
16235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16236 Spaces ! inter-word
16244 \begin_layout Enumerate
16248 \begin_inset space ~
16253 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16254 \begin_inset space ~
16258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16260 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
16265 \begin_inset Index idx
16268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16277 \begin_layout Enumerate
16281 \begin_inset space ~
16285 \begin_inset space ~
16289 \begin_inset space ~
16296 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16298 \begin_inset space ~
16303 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16304 This function is also bound to
16307 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16313 \begin_layout Standard
16314 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16317 \begin_layout Itemize
16319 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16323 \begin_inset space \space{}
16326 this is too much space!
16329 \begin_layout Itemize
16330 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
16334 \begin_layout Standard
16335 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16336 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
16337 will take care of this.
16340 \begin_layout Standard
16341 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16345 \begin_inset space ~
16350 feature described in the section
16356 Additional Features
16361 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16363 \begin_inset Index idx
16366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16367 Typography ! Quotes
16373 \begin_inset Index idx
16376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16407 \begin_layout Standard
16408 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
16409 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16410 and use a closing quote at the end.
16412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16420 The keyboard character,
16424 , generates this automatically.
16427 \begin_layout Standard
16428 You can specify what character the
16432 key produces using the submenu
16438 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16442 \begin_inset Index idx
16445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16446 Document ! Settings
16456 There are six choices:
16459 \begin_layout Labeling
16460 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16483 \begin_layout Labeling
16484 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16487 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16491 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16497 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16501 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16507 \begin_layout Labeling
16508 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16511 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16515 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16521 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16525 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16531 \begin_layout Labeling
16532 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16535 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16539 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16545 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16549 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16555 \begin_layout Labeling
16556 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16559 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16563 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16569 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16573 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16579 \begin_layout Labeling
16580 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16583 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16587 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16593 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16597 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16603 \begin_layout Standard
16604 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16607 arg "quote-insert single"
16613 \begin_layout Subsection
16615 \begin_inset Index idx
16618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16619 Typography ! Ligatures
16625 \begin_inset Index idx
16628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16657 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16659 name "sub:Ligatures"
16666 \begin_layout Standard
16667 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16668 print them as single characters.
16669 These groups are known as
16674 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
16676 Here are the standard ligatures:
16679 \begin_layout Itemize
16683 \begin_layout Itemize
16687 \begin_layout Itemize
16691 \begin_layout Itemize
16695 \begin_layout Itemize
16699 \begin_layout Standard
16700 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
16703 \begin_layout Standard
16704 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
16705 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
16706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16713 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
16714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16729 To break a ligature, use
16731 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16732 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16734 \begin_inset space ~
16741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16752 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16769 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16777 \begin_layout Subsection
16779 \begin_inset Index idx
16782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16789 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16791 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
16798 \begin_layout Standard
16799 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
16800 characters in different sizes and positions.
16801 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
16802 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
16803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16822 \begin_inset Note Note
16825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16826 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the Text appears as proper
16827 name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
16832 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the
16833 following proper names:
16836 \begin_layout Description
16837 LyX The name of the game, write
16838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16859 \begin_layout Description
16860 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
16861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16882 \begin_layout Description
16883 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
16884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16905 \begin_layout Description
16906 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
16907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16928 \begin_layout Standard
16929 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
16930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16934 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
16938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16942 It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
16943 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
16944 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
16947 : The actual version is
16948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16955 , the previous one was
16956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16966 \begin_layout Standard
16967 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
16968 you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word.
16969 In LyX this will look like
16970 \begin_inset Graphics
16971 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
16977 \begin_inset Newline newline
16980 For more about TeX Code, see section
16981 \begin_inset space ~
16985 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16987 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
16994 \begin_layout Subsection
16996 \begin_inset Index idx
16999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17008 \begin_layout Standard
17009 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17010 space between two words.
17011 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17021 for units use the menu
17023 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17024 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17026 \begin_inset space ~
17034 arg "space-insert thin"
17040 \begin_layout Standard
17041 Here is an example to show the differences:
17044 \begin_layout Standard
17045 \begin_inset Tabular
17046 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17047 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
17048 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17049 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17056 \begin_inset space ~
17060 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17072 space between number and unit
17079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17084 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17088 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17100 half space between number and unit
17113 \begin_layout Subsection
17115 \begin_inset Index idx
17118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17119 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17127 \begin_layout Standard
17128 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17130 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17131 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17132 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17133 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17134 These bits of text became known as
17145 \begin_layout Standard
17146 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17147 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17148 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17149 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17150 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
17151 specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
17152 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17153 \begin_inset Newline newline
17161 \begin_inset Newline newline
17169 \begin_inset Newline newline
17172 to the LaTeX preamble of your document to avoid them.
17173 Some LaTeX books (such as
17174 \begin_inset space ~
17178 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17180 key "latexcompanion"
17185 \begin_inset space ~
17189 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17195 ) have more information about the technical details of LaTeX's page break
17199 \begin_layout Chapter
17200 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17201 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17203 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17210 \begin_layout Standard
17211 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17214 \begin_inset space ~
17220 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17223 \begin_layout Section
17225 \begin_inset Index idx
17228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17235 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17244 \begin_layout Standard
17245 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17248 \begin_layout Description
17250 \begin_inset space ~
17253 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17254 \begin_inset Newline newline
17258 \begin_inset Note Note
17261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17262 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17270 \begin_layout Description
17271 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17272 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
17274 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17275 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17288 \begin_inset space ~
17294 \begin_inset Newline newline
17298 \begin_inset Note Comment
17301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17302 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
17310 \begin_layout Description
17312 \begin_inset space ~
17315 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17316 set in the document settings under
17318 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17320 \begin_inset space ~
17326 \begin_inset Newline newline
17330 \begin_inset Newline newline
17334 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17343 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17344 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17349 of a comment that appears in the output.
17355 \begin_inset Newline newline
17359 \begin_inset Newline newline
17362 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17365 \begin_layout Standard
17366 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17374 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17378 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17381 \begin_layout Section
17383 \begin_inset Index idx
17386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17393 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17395 name "sec:Footnotes"
17402 \begin_layout Standard
17403 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
17406 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17409 or the toolbar button
17412 arg "footnote-insert"
17424 \begin_inset Graphics
17425 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17434 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
17444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17463 label, the box will
17467 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17468 Clicking on the box label again will close
17481 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17482 and click on the footnote
17497 \begin_layout Standard
17498 Here is an example footnote:
17506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17507 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17515 \begin_layout Standard
17516 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17517 position where the footnote box is placed.
17518 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17519 The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class.
17520 LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get
17521 other schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
17526 ey are described in the
17529 \begin_inset space ~
17537 \begin_layout Section
17539 \begin_inset Index idx
17542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17549 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17551 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17558 \begin_layout Standard
17559 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
17560 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17562 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17564 \begin_inset space ~
17569 or the toolbar button
17572 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17598 appearing within your text.
17599 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
17608 \begin_layout Standard
17609 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17613 \begin_inset Marginal
17616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17618 This is a marginal note.
17626 \begin_layout Standard
17627 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17628 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17629 pages, right on odd pages.
17632 \begin_layout Standard
17633 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17636 \begin_inset space ~
17644 \begin_inset space ~
17652 \begin_layout Section
17653 Graphics and Images
17654 \begin_inset Index idx
17657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17664 \begin_inset Index idx
17667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17674 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17676 name "sec:Graphics"
17683 \begin_layout Standard
17684 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17685 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17688 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17693 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17697 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17700 \begin_layout Standard
17701 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17706 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17707 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17709 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17710 \begin_inset space ~
17714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17716 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
17723 \begin_layout Standard
17728 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
17729 of the image in the output.
17730 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
17734 \begin_inset space ~
17738 \begin_inset space ~
17747 \begin_inset space ~
17751 \begin_inset space ~
17755 \begin_inset space ~
17760 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
17761 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
17769 \begin_layout Standard
17776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17784 \begin_inset space ~
17788 \begin_inset space ~
17795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17804 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
17805 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
17809 \begin_inset space ~
17814 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
17815 with the image size is printed.
17819 \begin_inset space ~
17823 \begin_inset space ~
17827 \begin_inset space ~
17832 is explained in the
17835 \begin_inset space ~
17847 \begin_layout Standard
17848 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
17849 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
17851 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
17854 \begin_layout Standard
17856 \begin_inset Graphics
17857 filename clipart/mobius.eps
17865 \begin_layout Standard
17866 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
17867 the image into a float, see section
17868 \begin_inset space ~
17872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17874 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
17881 \begin_layout Subsection
17883 \begin_inset Index idx
17886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17893 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17895 name "sub:Image-Formats"
17902 \begin_layout Standard
17903 You can insert images in any known file format.
17904 But as we explained in section
17905 \begin_inset space ~
17909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17911 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17915 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
17916 LyX therefore uses the program
17920 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
17921 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
17922 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
17923 \begin_inset space ~
17927 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17929 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17936 \begin_layout Standard
17937 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
17940 \begin_layout Description
17942 \begin_inset space ~
17945 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
17946 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
17947 Well-known bitmap image formats are
17948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17951 Graphics Interchange Format
17952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17955 (GIF, file extension
17956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17968 \begin_inset Index idx
17971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18003 Portable Network Graphics
18004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18007 (PNG, file extension
18008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18020 \begin_inset Index idx
18023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18055 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18059 (JPG, file extension
18060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18084 \begin_inset Index idx
18087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18118 \begin_layout Description
18120 \begin_inset space ~
18123 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18125 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18126 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18127 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18128 \begin_inset Newline newline
18131 Scalable image formats can be
18132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18135 Scalable Vector Graphics
18136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18139 (SVG, file extension
18140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18152 \begin_inset Index idx
18155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18187 Encapsulated PostScript
18188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18191 (EPS, file extension
18192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18204 \begin_inset Index idx
18207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18239 Portable Document Format
18240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18243 (PDF, file extension
18244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18256 \begin_inset Index idx
18259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18274 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18275 result will not be scalable.
18276 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18282 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18290 \begin_layout Standard
18291 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18298 \begin_layout Subsection
18299 Grouping of Image Settings
18300 \begin_inset Index idx
18303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18304 Images ! Settings grouping
18312 \begin_layout Standard
18313 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18315 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18316 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18318 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18319 need to manually change each of them.
18323 \begin_layout Standard
18324 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18327 \begin_inset space ~
18331 \begin_inset space ~
18346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18354 \begin_inset space ~
18358 \begin_inset space ~
18365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18375 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18376 and checking the name of the desired group.
18379 \begin_layout Section
18381 \begin_inset Index idx
18384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18391 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18400 \begin_layout Standard
18401 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18404 arg "tabular-insert"
18409 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18413 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18414 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18415 from the rest of the table.
18416 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18417 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18419 Here is an example table:
18422 \begin_layout Standard
18424 \begin_inset Tabular
18425 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18426 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
18427 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18428 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18429 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18430 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18630 \begin_layout Subsection
18634 \begin_layout Standard
18635 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18638 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18642 This brings up the table dialog.
18643 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18644 cursor is placed currently.
18645 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18646 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18647 done on all of your selection.
18650 \begin_layout Standard
18651 In addition to the table dialog, the
18654 \begin_inset space ~
18659 helps you in setting table properties.
18660 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18663 \begin_layout Standard
18667 \begin_inset space ~
18672 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18673 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18674 current cell respectively.
18675 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18677 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18678 of text, see section
18679 \begin_inset space ~
18683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18685 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
18692 \begin_layout Standard
18693 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18694 using the check box
18703 This will merge the cells to
18707 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18708 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18709 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18710 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18711 in the last row without the upper border:
18714 \begin_layout Standard
18716 \begin_inset Tabular
18717 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18718 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18719 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18720 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18721 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18722 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18733 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18742 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18818 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18853 \begin_layout Standard
18854 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
18855 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
18856 explained in the chapter
18863 \begin_inset space ~
18869 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
18870 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18873 degrees counterclockwise.
18874 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
18877 \begin_layout Standard
18878 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18886 Most DVI-viewers are
18890 able to display rotations.
18898 \begin_layout Standard
18903 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
18908 adds lines for all cell borders.
18911 \begin_layout Subsection
18913 \begin_inset Index idx
18916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18917 Tables ! Longtables
18923 \begin_inset Index idx
18926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18935 \begin_layout Standard
18936 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
18939 \begin_inset space ~
18943 \begin_inset space ~
18952 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
18953 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
18956 \begin_layout Description
18961 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18962 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
18963 except for the first page, if
18966 \begin_inset space ~
18974 \begin_layout Description
18978 \begin_inset space ~
18983 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18984 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
18987 \begin_layout Description
18992 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18993 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
18994 except for the last page, if
18997 \begin_inset space ~
19005 \begin_layout Description
19009 \begin_inset space ~
19014 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19015 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19018 \begin_layout Description
19019 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19020 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19022 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
19026 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19029 \begin_inset space ~
19037 \begin_layout Standard
19038 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19039 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19040 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19046 In this context, first means first in this order:
19049 \begin_inset space ~
19061 \begin_inset space ~
19066 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19069 \begin_layout Standard
19071 \begin_inset Tabular
19072 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19073 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19074 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19075 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19076 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19077 <row endfirsthead="true">
19078 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19084 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19089 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19098 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19108 <row endfirsthead="true">
19109 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19120 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19129 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19141 <row endhead="true">
19142 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19153 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19162 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19172 <row endhead="true">
19173 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19184 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19193 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19205 <row endfoot="true">
19206 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19217 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19226 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19257 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20198 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20207 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20216 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20227 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20258 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20289 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20320 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20351 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20382 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20413 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20444 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20475 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20506 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20537 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20568 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20599 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20630 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20661 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20692 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20723 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20754 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20785 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20816 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20847 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20878 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20909 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20940 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20971 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21002 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21033 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21064 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21095 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21126 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21157 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21187 <row endlastfoot="true">
21188 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21199 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21208 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21225 \begin_layout Subsection
21227 \begin_inset Index idx
21230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21239 name "sub:Table-Cells"
21246 \begin_layout Standard
21247 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21248 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21249 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21250 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21254 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21257 \begin_layout Standard
21258 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21259 for the column in the table dialog.
21260 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21261 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21265 \begin_layout Standard
21267 \begin_inset Tabular
21268 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21269 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21270 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21271 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21272 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21292 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21361 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21417 This is longer now.
21422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21473 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21474 This is longer now.
21479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21505 \begin_layout Standard
21506 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21507 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21512 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21513 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21519 Selection with the mouse or with
21523 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21524 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21525 the selection from outside the table.
21528 \begin_layout Section
21530 \begin_inset Index idx
21533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21540 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21549 \begin_layout Subsection
21553 \begin_layout Standard
21554 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21555 have a fixed location.
21557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21564 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21572 \begin_inset space ~
21577 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21578 too many notes on the current page.
21581 \begin_layout Standard
21582 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21583 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21584 and pages without text.
21585 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21586 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21587 Floats are therefore numbered.
21588 Referencing is described in section
21589 \begin_inset space ~
21593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21595 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21602 \begin_layout Standard
21603 To insert a float, use the menu
21605 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21609 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21610 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21612 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21613 \begin_inset Index idx
21616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21622 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21623 paragraph within the float.
21624 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
21625 by left-clicking on the box label.
21626 A closed float box looks like this:
21627 \begin_inset Graphics
21628 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21633 – a gray button with a red label.
21636 \begin_layout Standard
21637 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors
21638 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21641 \begin_layout Subsection
21645 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21649 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
21654 \begin_inset Index idx
21657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21658 Floats ! Figure floats
21666 \begin_layout Standard
21668 \begin_inset space ~
21672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21674 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21678 was created using the menu
21680 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21681 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21687 arg "float-insert figure"
21691 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21694 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21700 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21704 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21705 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21707 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21709 \begin_inset space ~
21717 arg "layout-paragraph"
21723 \begin_layout Standard
21724 \begin_inset Float figure
21729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21731 \begin_inset Graphics
21732 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21742 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21745 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21747 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21751 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21764 \begin_layout Standard
21765 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21766 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
21768 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21777 ) and refer to it using the menu
21779 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21785 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
21789 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
21790 vague references like
21791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21798 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
21800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21808 For more about cross-references, see section
21809 \begin_inset space ~
21813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21815 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21822 \begin_layout Standard
21823 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
21824 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
21825 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
21826 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
21827 as described in section
21828 \begin_inset space ~
21832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21834 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
21840 \begin_inset space ~
21844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21846 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21850 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
21851 You can also set the images one below the other.
21853 \begin_inset space ~
21857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21859 reference "fig:Undefinable"
21864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21866 reference "fig:Platypus"
21870 are the subfigures.
21873 \begin_layout Standard
21874 \begin_inset Float figure
21879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21880 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21884 \begin_inset Float figure
21889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21890 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21893 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21895 name "fig:Undefinable"
21907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21908 \begin_inset Graphics
21909 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
21920 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21924 \begin_inset Float figure
21929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21930 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21933 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21935 name "fig:Platypus"
21947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21948 \begin_inset Graphics
21949 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21961 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21968 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21971 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21973 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21977 Two distorted images.
21990 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21992 \begin_inset Index idx
21995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21996 Floats ! Table floats
22004 \begin_layout Standard
22005 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22007 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22008 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22011 or the toolbar button
22014 arg "float-insert table"
22018 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22019 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22020 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22022 \begin_inset space ~
22026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22028 reference "tab:Table-float"
22035 \begin_layout Standard
22036 \begin_inset Float table
22041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22042 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22045 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22047 name "tab:Table-float"
22059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22061 \begin_inset Tabular
22062 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22063 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
22064 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22065 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22066 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22193 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22214 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22217 \end{array}\right]$
22225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22238 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22259 \begin_layout Subsection
22261 \begin_inset Index idx
22264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22273 \begin_layout Standard
22274 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22275 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22276 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22278 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22286 \begin_inset space ~
22294 \begin_layout Section
22296 \begin_inset Index idx
22299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22308 \begin_layout Standard
22309 LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
22311 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22312 \begin_inset space \space{}
22319 \begin_layout Standard
22320 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22322 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22326 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22327 and its alignment within the page.
22330 \begin_layout Standard
22332 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22342 height_special "totalheight"
22345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22348 This is a minipage.
22349 The text is set in an italic style.
22352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22355 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22356 another formatting.
22364 \begin_layout Standard
22365 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22368 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22372 as described in section
22373 \begin_inset space ~
22377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22379 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
22384 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22390 \begin_layout Standard
22391 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22401 height_special "totalheight"
22404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22405 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22406 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22412 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22416 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22426 height_special "totalheight"
22429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22430 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22431 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22439 \begin_layout Standard
22440 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22446 \begin_layout Standard
22447 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22449 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22456 \begin_inset space ~
22464 \begin_layout Chapter
22465 Mathematical Formulas
22466 \begin_inset Index idx
22469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22476 \begin_inset Index idx
22479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22508 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22510 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22517 \begin_layout Standard
22518 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22523 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22526 \begin_layout Section
22528 \begin_inset Index idx
22531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22540 \begin_layout Standard
22541 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22554 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22556 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22557 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22558 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22560 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22566 \begin_layout Standard
22567 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22571 \begin_inset space ~
22576 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22579 \begin_layout Standard
22580 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22581 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22584 \begin_layout Standard
22585 This is a line with an inline formula
22586 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22592 \begin_layout Standard
22593 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22594 paragraph, like this one:
22595 \begin_inset Formula
22602 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22605 \begin_layout Standard
22606 LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands.
22607 For example, typing
22608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22621 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22622 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22626 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22629 \begin_inset space ~
22637 \begin_layout Subsection
22638 Navigating in Formulas
22639 \begin_inset Index idx
22642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22651 \begin_layout Standard
22652 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22653 achieved with the arrow keys.
22654 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22655 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22660 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22661 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22665 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22669 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22672 \end{array}\right]$
22680 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22685 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22686 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22689 \begin_layout Standard
22694 , printed in this document as
22695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22699 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22706 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22707 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22708 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22713 For example, if you want
22714 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22722 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22732 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22736 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22741 , since in the latter case only the
22744 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
22749 will be under the square root sign:
22750 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
22756 \begin_layout Standard
22757 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
22759 \begin_inset Formula
22761 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
22770 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
22771 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
22774 \begin_layout Subsection
22778 \begin_layout Standard
22779 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
22780 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
22784 and a cursor movement key to select text.
22785 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
22786 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
22787 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
22788 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
22791 \begin_layout Subsection
22792 Exponents and Subscripts
22793 \begin_inset Index idx
22796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22803 \begin_inset Index idx
22806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22815 \begin_layout Standard
22816 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
22819 arg "math-superscript"
22825 arg "math-subscript"
22828 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
22830 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
22833 , type in a formula
22836 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22846 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
22852 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
22856 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
22862 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22868 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
22870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22877 , you have to use an extra
22881 to separate the circumflex and the character.
22882 For example, if you want
22883 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
22889 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22895 Subscripts are similar: To get
22896 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
22902 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22910 \begin_layout Subsection
22912 \begin_inset Index idx
22915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22924 \begin_layout Standard
22925 Create a fraction either with the command
22931 or by using the icon
22934 arg "math-insert \\frac"
22940 \begin_inset space ~
22946 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
22947 The cursor is above the fraction line.
22948 To move it to the bottom, simply press
22953 To move back up, press
22958 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
22959 \begin_inset Formula
22961 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
22964 \end{array}\right)}\right]
22972 \begin_layout Subsection
22974 \begin_inset Index idx
22977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22986 \begin_layout Standard
22987 Roots can be created using the
22990 \begin_inset space ~
22998 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23004 arg "math-insert \\root"
23026 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23032 always produces a square root.
23035 \begin_layout Subsection
23036 Operators with Limits
23037 \begin_inset Index idx
23040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23047 \begin_inset Index idx
23050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23057 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23059 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23066 \begin_layout Standard
23068 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23072 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23075 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23076 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
23077 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23078 The sum operator will automatically place its
23079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23086 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23088 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23092 \begin_inset Formula
23094 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23099 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23103 \begin_layout Standard
23104 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23106 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23107 behind the operator and using the menu
23109 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23110 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23112 \begin_inset space ~
23116 \begin_inset space ~
23130 \begin_layout Standard
23131 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23140 \begin_inset Index idx
23143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23150 \begin_inset Formula
23152 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23157 which will place the
23158 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23170 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23171 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23177 \begin_layout Standard
23178 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23185 Have a look at section
23186 \begin_inset space ~
23190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23192 reference "sub:Functions"
23196 for an explanation of function macros.
23199 \begin_layout Subsection
23201 \begin_inset Index idx
23204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23213 \begin_layout Standard
23214 Most math symbols can be found in the
23217 \begin_inset space ~
23222 under one of several categories; including
23239 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23243 \begin_layout Standard
23244 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
23245 you don't have to use the
23248 \begin_inset space ~
23253 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23254 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23257 \begin_layout Subsection
23259 \begin_inset Index idx
23262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23271 \begin_layout Standard
23272 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23277 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
23283 \begin_inset space ~
23293 arg "math-insert \\space"
23299 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23300 For example, the sequence
23305 \begin_inset Formula $a\, b$
23309 \begin_inset Graphics
23310 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23315 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23316 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23317 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23318 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
23320 Here are two examples:
23323 \begin_layout Standard
23333 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23339 \begin_layout Standard
23349 \begin_inset Formula $a\! b$
23355 \begin_layout Subsection
23357 \begin_inset Index idx
23360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23367 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23369 name "sub:Functions"
23376 \begin_layout Standard
23380 \begin_inset space ~
23385 contains under the button
23390 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23395 a number of function macros, such as
23396 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23400 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23408 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23415 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23416 avoid confusions, because
23417 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23421 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23427 \begin_layout Standard
23428 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23430 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23434 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23440 \begin_layout Standard
23441 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23442 are placed, as described in section
23443 \begin_inset space ~
23447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23449 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23456 \begin_layout Subsection
23458 \begin_inset Index idx
23461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23470 \begin_layout Standard
23471 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23473 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23474 You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter
23475 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23478 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23479 Our example is entered by typing
23484 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23491 \begin_inset space ~
23495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23497 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23501 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23504 \begin_layout Standard
23505 \begin_inset Float table
23510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23511 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23514 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23516 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23520 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23530 \begin_inset Tabular
23531 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23532 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
23533 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23534 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23535 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23619 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23673 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23727 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23781 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
23791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23835 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
23845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23889 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
23899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23943 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
23953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23997 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24051 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24096 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24117 \begin_layout Standard
24118 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24121 \begin_inset space ~
24129 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24132 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24136 \begin_layout Section
24137 Brackets and Delimiters
24138 \begin_inset Index idx
24141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24148 \begin_inset Index idx
24151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24158 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24160 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24167 \begin_layout Standard
24168 There are several brackets available through LyX.
24169 For some purposes, using just the keys
24174 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24175 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24176 toolbar delimiter icon
24179 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24183 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24184 \begin_inset Formula
24186 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24194 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24195 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24199 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24202 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24208 \begin_inset Formula
24210 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24218 \begin_layout Standard
24219 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24220 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24224 \begin_layout Standard
24225 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24226 left side and right side.
24227 If you use the option
24230 \begin_inset space ~
24235 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24236 The selection will be shown as TeX code.
24237 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24242 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24245 \begin_layout Standard
24246 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24247 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24248 is to go inside the brackets.
24249 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24254 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24255 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24256 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24260 arg "math-delim ( )"
24266 \begin_layout Section
24267 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24268 \begin_inset Index idx
24271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24278 \begin_inset Index idx
24281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24288 \begin_inset Index idx
24291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24292 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24300 \begin_layout Standard
24301 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
24304 \begin_inset space ~
24314 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24320 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24321 Here is an example:
24322 \begin_inset Formula
24324 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24333 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24334 \begin_inset space ~
24338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24340 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24345 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24346 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24347 This alignment is set in the box
24352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24400 for every column as default.
24401 For example, the sequence
24402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24413 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24414 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24415 corresponds to the relevant column.
24416 The result will look like this:
24417 \begin_inset Formula
24420 this & this\, column & this\, column\\
24421 column & has & has\, right\\
24422 has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment
24431 \begin_layout Standard
24432 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24435 arg "newline-insert newline"
24438 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24439 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24441 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24444 or the math toolbar.
24447 \begin_layout Standard
24448 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24449 It can be created with the menu
24451 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24452 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24454 \begin_inset space ~
24466 Here is an example:
24467 \begin_inset Formula
24481 \begin_layout Standard
24482 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24485 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24488 arg "newline-insert newline"
24492 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24497 arg "newline-insert newline"
24500 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24508 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24509 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24510 A new row is created by every further entry of
24513 arg "newline-insert newline"
24517 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24518 Here is an example:
24519 \begin_inset Formula
24521 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24522 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24527 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24528 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24529 \begin_inset Formula
24531 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24539 \begin_layout Standard
24540 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24547 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24548 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24551 reference "eq:asquared"
24556 The other types are described in section
24557 \begin_inset space ~
24561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24563 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
24570 \begin_layout Section
24571 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24572 \begin_inset Index idx
24575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24576 Math ! Formula numbering
24582 \begin_inset Index idx
24585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24586 Math ! Referencing formulas
24592 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24594 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24601 \begin_layout Standard
24602 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24604 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24605 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24607 \begin_inset space ~
24611 \begin_inset space ~
24619 arg "math-number-toggle"
24623 The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses.
24624 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24625 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24626 the document class.
24627 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24628 separated by a dot:
24629 \begin_inset Formula
24639 arg "math-number-toggle"
24642 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24643 You can only number displayed formulas.
24646 \begin_layout Standard
24647 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24649 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24650 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24652 \begin_inset space ~
24656 \begin_inset space ~
24664 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24667 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24668 \begin_inset Formula
24671 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24677 To number all lines use the shortcut
24680 arg "math-number-toggle"
24686 \begin_layout Standard
24687 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24690 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24691 A label is inserted with the menu
24693 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24702 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24703 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24704 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24716 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24717 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24718 We inserted in the following example the label
24719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24726 in the second line:
24727 \begin_inset Formula
24729 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24730 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24735 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24736 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
24737 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24739 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24741 \begin_inset space ~
24749 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24753 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
24754 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
24755 as the formula number:
24758 \begin_layout Standard
24759 This is a cross-reference to equation (
24760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24762 reference "eq:tanhExp"
24769 \begin_layout Standard
24770 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
24771 \begin_inset space ~
24775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24777 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24782 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
24790 \begin_layout Section
24791 User defined math macros
24792 \begin_inset Index idx
24795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24804 \begin_layout Standard
24805 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
24806 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
24807 Math macros are explained in section
24810 \begin_inset space ~
24822 \begin_layout Section
24826 \begin_layout Subsection
24828 \begin_inset Index idx
24831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24840 \begin_layout Standard
24841 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
24842 To set a font in a formula, use the
24845 \begin_inset space ~
24855 arg "math-insert \\font"
24860 , or enter its command, listed in table
24861 \begin_inset space ~
24865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24867 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24874 \begin_layout Standard
24875 \begin_inset Float table
24880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24881 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24884 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24886 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24890 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
24898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24900 \begin_inset Tabular
24901 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
24902 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
24903 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24904 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24936 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
24944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24963 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
24971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24990 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
24998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25023 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25050 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25077 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25111 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25138 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25172 \begin_layout Standard
25173 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25181 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25197 \begin_layout Standard
25198 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25199 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25204 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25205 space when you need a space in the box.
25206 Here is an example where
25207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25218 denotes the set of numbers:
25219 \begin_inset Formula
25221 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N}
25229 \begin_layout Standard
25230 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25231 You can, for example, put a character in
25240 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25244 \begin_inset Newline newline
25247 So it is better not to use this feature.
25250 \begin_layout Standard
25251 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25252 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25256 \begin_inset Newline newline
25259 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25265 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25266 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25272 \begin_layout Standard
25279 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25282 \begin_layout Standard
25283 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25285 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25286 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25288 \begin_inset space ~
25296 \begin_layout Subsection
25298 \begin_inset Index idx
25301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25310 \begin_layout Standard
25311 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25313 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25317 \begin_inset space ~
25321 \begin_inset space ~
25329 \begin_inset space ~
25339 arg "math-insert \\font"
25351 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
25352 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25353 Here is an example:
25354 \begin_inset Formula
25357 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25358 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25367 \begin_layout Subsection
25369 \begin_inset Index idx
25372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25381 \begin_layout Standard
25382 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25383 automatically chosen in most situations.
25401 For most characters,
25409 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25410 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25415 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25416 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
25418 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25423 arg "math-insert \\style"
25429 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25430 For example, you can set
25431 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25434 , which is normally in
25443 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25447 The four styles are used in the following example:
25450 \begin_layout Standard
25451 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25455 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25459 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25463 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25469 \begin_layout Standard
25470 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25471 is set in a particular size with the menu
25473 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25475 \begin_inset space ~
25480 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25481 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25482 will be adjusted to correspond.
25483 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25494 \begin_layout Standard
25498 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25504 \begin_layout Section
25506 \begin_inset Index idx
25509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25516 \begin_inset Index idx
25519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25528 \begin_layout Standard
25529 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
25530 (AMS) that are in common use.
25533 \begin_layout Subsection
25534 Enabling AMS-Support
25537 \begin_layout Standard
25538 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25539 the document by selecting the checkbox
25542 \begin_inset space ~
25546 \begin_inset space ~
25550 \begin_inset space ~
25557 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25561 \begin_inset Index idx
25564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25565 Document ! Settings
25573 \begin_inset space ~
25579 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in
25580 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25583 \begin_layout Subsection
25585 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25587 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
25592 \begin_inset Index idx
25595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25596 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25604 \begin_layout Standard
25605 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
25606 LyX allows you to choose between
25627 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25628 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25634 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25637 \begin_layout Chapter
25641 \begin_layout Section
25643 \begin_inset Index idx
25646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25653 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25655 name "sec:Cross-References"
25662 \begin_layout Standard
25663 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
25664 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25666 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25667 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25668 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25671 \begin_layout Enumerate
25675 \begin_layout Enumerate
25676 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25678 name "enu:Second-item"
25685 \begin_layout Enumerate
25689 \begin_layout Standard
25690 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25692 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25695 or by pressing the toolbar button
25702 A gray label box like this:
25703 \begin_inset Graphics
25704 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25709 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25710 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25745 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
25746 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
25748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25762 \begin_layout Standard
25763 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
25765 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25768 or the toolbar button
25771 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25775 A gray cross-reference box like this:
25776 \begin_inset Graphics
25777 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
25782 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
25784 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
25785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25797 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
25801 \begin_layout Standard
25802 As an alternative to
25804 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25807 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
25812 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
25813 to the actual cursor position via the menu
25815 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25827 \begin_layout Standard
25828 Here is our cross-reference: Item
25829 \begin_inset space ~
25833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25835 reference "enu:Second-item"
25842 \begin_layout Standard
25843 It is recommended to use a protected space
25847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25848 described in section
25849 \begin_inset space ~
25853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25855 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
25864 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
25865 line breaks between them.
25868 \begin_layout Standard
25869 There are six formats of cross-references:
25872 \begin_layout Description
25873 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
25874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25876 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25883 \begin_layout Description
25884 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
25885 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
25887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25897 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25904 \begin_layout Description
25905 <page>: prints the page number: Page
25906 \begin_inset space ~
25910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25911 LatexCommand pageref
25912 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25919 \begin_layout Description
25921 \begin_inset space ~
25925 \begin_inset space ~
25928 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
25929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25930 LatexCommand vpageref
25931 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25936 \begin_inset Newline newline
25939 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
25940 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
25941 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
25942 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
25943 it prints “on the next page”.
25944 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
25947 \begin_layout Description
25949 \begin_inset space ~
25953 \begin_inset space ~
25957 \begin_inset space ~
25960 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
25961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25963 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25968 \begin_inset Newline newline
25971 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
25977 ; otherwise it behaves like
25981 \begin_inset space ~
25985 \begin_inset space ~
25994 \begin_layout Description
25996 \begin_inset space ~
25999 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26000 \begin_inset Newline newline
26004 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26012 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
26021 \begin_inset Index idx
26024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26025 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
26031 \begin_inset Index idx
26034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26035 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
26046 \begin_inset Newline newline
26049 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
26052 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26056 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26057 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26065 is the default and preferred because
26069 supports only English documents.
26070 The format is specified by using the command
26082 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
26083 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26096 ) can be done with this command
26097 \begin_inset Newline newline
26104 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26109 \begin_inset Newline newline
26112 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26114 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26116 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26123 \begin_layout Description
26125 \begin_inset space ~
26128 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26130 LatexCommand nameref
26131 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26138 \begin_layout Standard
26139 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26140 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
26141 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26145 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26149 \begin_layout Standard
26150 You can only use the style
26154 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26158 is always possible.
26161 \begin_layout Standard
26162 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26163 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26165 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26166 \begin_inset space ~
26170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26172 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26179 \begin_layout Standard
26180 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26184 \begin_inset space ~
26188 \begin_inset space ~
26193 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26194 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26197 \begin_inset space ~
26202 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26203 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26206 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26212 \begin_layout Standard
26213 You can change labels at any time.
26214 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26215 do not need to think about this.
26218 \begin_layout Standard
26219 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in LyX
26220 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output
26221 instead of the reference.
26224 \begin_layout Standard
26225 References are described in detail in the section
26226 \begin_inset space ~
26230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26240 \begin_inset space ~
26248 \begin_layout Section
26249 Table of Contents and other Listings
26250 \begin_inset Index idx
26253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26260 \begin_inset Index idx
26263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26270 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26279 \begin_layout Subsection
26281 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26283 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
26290 \begin_layout Standard
26291 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26293 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26294 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26296 \begin_inset space ~
26300 \begin_inset space ~
26306 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
26307 If you click on it, the
26311 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26312 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26313 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26315 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26317 \begin_inset space ~
26322 that is described in section
26323 \begin_inset space ~
26327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26329 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
26336 \begin_layout Standard
26337 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26338 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26340 \begin_inset space ~
26344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26346 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26350 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26352 \begin_inset space ~
26356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26358 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
26362 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26364 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26367 \begin_layout Subsection
26368 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26369 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26371 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
26378 \begin_layout Standard
26379 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26381 You can insert them via the
26383 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26387 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26390 \begin_layout Section
26391 URLs and Hyperlinks
26392 \begin_inset Index idx
26395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26402 \begin_inset Index idx
26405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26414 \begin_layout Subsection
26416 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26425 \begin_layout Standard
26426 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26428 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26434 \begin_layout Standard
26435 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
26436 \begin_inset Flex URL
26439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26449 \begin_layout Standard
26450 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26456 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26460 \begin_layout Standard
26461 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26469 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
26477 \begin_layout Subsection
26479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26481 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
26488 \begin_layout Standard
26489 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26491 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26494 or with the toolbar button
26501 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26510 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26511 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26512 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26514 name "LyX's homepage"
26515 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26519 , an Email address like this:
26520 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26522 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26523 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26528 , or a link to a file.
26531 \begin_layout Standard
26532 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26545 to the link target.
26548 \begin_layout Standard
26549 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26550 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26551 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26552 the text style dialog.
26553 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26557 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26559 name "LyX's homepage"
26560 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26567 \begin_layout Standard
26568 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26572 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26574 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26575 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26579 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26581 \begin_inset Newline newline
26589 \begin_inset Newline newline
26596 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26599 \begin_layout Section
26601 \begin_inset Index idx
26604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26613 name "sec:Appendices"
26620 \begin_layout Standard
26621 Appendices are created with the menu
26623 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26625 \begin_inset space ~
26629 \begin_inset space ~
26635 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26636 as the appendix part of the book.
26637 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26640 \begin_layout Standard
26641 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26642 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26643 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26644 and the subsection number.
26645 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26649 \begin_layout Standard
26651 \begin_inset space ~
26655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26657 reference "chap:Credits"
26662 \begin_inset space ~
26666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26668 reference "sub:Export"
26675 \begin_layout Section
26677 \begin_inset Index idx
26680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26687 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26689 name "sec:Bibliography"
26696 \begin_layout Standard
26697 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
26698 You can include a bibliography database,
26702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26703 Known under the name
26704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26716 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26717 manually, using the paragraph environment
26721 , which was described in section
26722 \begin_inset space ~
26726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26728 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
26733 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26734 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
26738 use a bibliography database.
26741 \begin_layout Subsection
26742 The Bibliography Environment
26745 \begin_layout Standard
26750 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26752 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
26761 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
26763 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
26765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26772 , a short form of its title, as the key.
26775 \begin_layout Standard
26776 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
26778 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26781 or the toolbar button
26784 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
26788 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
26789 containing the available citations.
26790 Select one or more keys from the list and
26800 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
26801 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
26805 \begin_layout Standard
26806 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
26807 entry with surrounding brackets.
26812 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
26813 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
26815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26825 \begin_layout Standard
26828 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
26831 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26833 key "latexcompanion"
26840 \begin_layout Standard
26841 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
26842 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26851 \begin_layout Standard
26852 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
26855 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26857 \begin_inset space ~
26865 arg "layout-paragraph"
26869 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
26872 \begin_layout Subsection
26873 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
26874 \begin_inset Index idx
26877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26878 Bibliography ! Databases
26884 \begin_inset Index idx
26887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26888 Bibliography ! BibTeX
26894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26896 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
26903 \begin_layout Standard
26904 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
26909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26910 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
26912 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
26913 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
26918 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
26920 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
26921 your working field in a database.
26922 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
26923 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
26924 list for that document.
26925 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
26929 \begin_layout Standard
26930 The database is a text file with the file extension
26931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26942 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
26943 The format is explained in
26944 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26950 and in the LaTeX books (
26951 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26953 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
26958 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
26959 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
26960 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
26961 \begin_inset Flex URL
26964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26966 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
26974 \begin_layout Standard
26975 To use a database, use the menu
26977 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26982 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26995 \begin_inset space ~
27001 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27002 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27009 Add bibliography to TOC
27011 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27016 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27017 in the document or just the cited references.
27020 \begin_layout Standard
27021 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27033 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27034 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27035 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27037 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27043 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27044 \begin_inset Newline newline
27048 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27050 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27062 \begin_layout Standard
27063 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27066 \begin_layout Standard
27067 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
27068 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the
27074 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27075 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27080 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27081 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27082 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27097 The following variants are possible:
27100 \begin_layout Description
27101 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27102 with other bibliography packages (e.
27103 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27107 \begin_inset space \space{}
27114 ), only with the package
27118 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27122 \begin_layout Description
27123 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27124 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27125 with all bibliography packages, except
27130 \begin_layout Description
27131 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27136 , works with all bibliography packages
27139 \begin_layout Standard
27140 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27142 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27148 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27157 \begin_layout Standard
27158 When you select the option
27160 Sectioned bibliography
27164 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27165 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27168 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27169 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27171 Customizing Bibliographies
27179 Additional Features
27184 \begin_layout Standard
27185 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27186 the two methods of creating them.
27187 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27188 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27189 We used the style file
27193 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27196 \begin_layout Subsection
27197 Bibliography layout
27198 \begin_inset Index idx
27201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27202 Bibliography ! Layout
27210 \begin_layout Standard
27211 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27212 For this feature you need to enable the option
27218 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27222 \begin_inset Index idx
27225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27226 Document ! Settings
27236 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27237 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
27238 in the previous section.
27241 \begin_layout Standard
27242 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27243 the citation reference window.
27244 Here is an example where the text
27245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27249 \begin_inset space ~
27253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27256 appears after the reference:
27259 \begin_layout Standard
27261 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27264 key "latexcompanion"
27271 \begin_layout Section
27273 \begin_inset Index idx
27276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27283 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27292 \begin_layout Standard
27293 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27295 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27297 \begin_inset space ~
27302 or the toolbar button
27309 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27310 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27311 by LyX as the index entry.
27314 \begin_layout Standard
27315 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27317 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27318 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27320 \begin_inset space ~
27326 A light blue box labeled
27327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27338 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27339 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
27342 \begin_layout Standard
27343 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27344 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
27346 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27348 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27355 \begin_layout Subsection
27356 Grouping Index Entries
27357 \begin_inset Index idx
27360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27369 \begin_layout Standard
27370 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27372 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27373 lists under the entry
27374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27382 First we create the entry
27383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27391 \begin_inset space ~
27395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27397 reference "sub:Lists"
27402 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27403 \begin_inset space ~
27407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27409 reference "sec:Itemize"
27413 , we insert the command
27416 \begin_layout Standard
27422 \begin_layout Standard
27426 \begin_layout Standard
27432 \begin_layout Standard
27433 for the enumerated list in section
27434 \begin_inset space ~
27438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27440 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27447 \begin_layout Standard
27448 The exclamation mark
27449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27456 marks the grouping levels.
27457 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27458 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27459 If we don't have an index entry for
27460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27467 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27470 \begin_layout Subsection
27472 \begin_inset Index idx
27475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27476 Index ! Page ranges
27484 \begin_layout Standard
27485 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27487 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27488 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27489 an index entry in section
27490 \begin_inset space ~
27494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27496 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27503 \begin_layout Standard
27506 Paragraph environments|(
27509 \begin_layout Standard
27510 and another entry at the end of section
27511 \begin_inset space ~
27515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27517 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
27524 \begin_layout Standard
27527 Paragraph environments|)
27530 \begin_layout Standard
27532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27555 respectively start and end the index range.
27556 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27557 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27558 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27559 An example is the index entry
27560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27563 Document ! Settings
27564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27570 \begin_layout Subsection
27572 \begin_inset Index idx
27575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27576 Index ! Cross referencing
27584 \begin_layout Standard
27585 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27586 We referred for example in the index entry
27587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27595 \begin_inset space ~
27599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27601 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
27605 ) to the index entry
27606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27613 in the same section using the entry
27616 \begin_layout Standard
27619 GIF|see{Image formats}
27622 \begin_layout Standard
27623 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
27624 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27625 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27628 \begin_layout Subsection
27630 \begin_inset Index idx
27633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27634 Index ! Entry order
27642 \begin_layout Standard
27643 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27644 follow the rules for the index order.
27645 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
27649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27650 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27652 \begin_inset space ~
27656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27658 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27667 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27668 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27693 \begin_inset Index idx
27696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27697 Dummy entries ! maïs
27703 \begin_inset Index idx
27706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27707 Dummy entries ! maître
27713 \begin_inset Index idx
27716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27717 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27722 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27723 maïs, maison, maître.
27724 To achieve this, we use the command
27727 \begin_layout Standard
27730 previous entry@current entry
27733 \begin_layout Standard
27734 In our case we want to have
27735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27750 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27753 \begin_layout Standard
27759 \begin_layout Standard
27760 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
27761 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
27762 See the next subsection for an example.
27765 \begin_layout Standard
27766 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27772 \begin_layout Standard
27773 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
27778 to generate the index (see sec.
27779 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27785 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27794 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
27796 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27802 reference "sub:Document-Font"
27806 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
27807 index commands start with
27808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27820 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
27825 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
27828 \begin_layout Standard
27840 \begin_layout Standard
27852 \begin_layout Subsection
27854 \begin_inset Index idx
27857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27858 Index ! Entry layout
27866 \begin_layout Standard
27867 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
27868 \begin_inset Index idx
27871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27874 This is an italic dummy entry
27879 You can also format the page number using the character
27880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27887 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
27888 We can write for example
27891 \begin_layout Standard
27894 italic page number:|textit
27897 \begin_layout Standard
27898 to get the page number in italic.
27899 \begin_inset Index idx
27902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27903 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
27908 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
27910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27926 \begin_inset space ~
27932 Have a look at section
27933 \begin_inset space ~
27937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27939 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
27943 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
27946 \begin_layout Standard
27947 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27955 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
27959 to generate the index, see sec.
27960 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27966 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27975 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
27980 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
27981 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27984 key "latexcompanion"
27996 \begin_layout Standard
27997 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
27999 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28000 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28001 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28002 If so, put the following in the preamble
28005 \begin_layout Standard
28017 \begin_layout Standard
28021 \begin_layout Standard
28027 \begin_layout Standard
28028 in the index entry.
28029 \begin_inset Index idx
28032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28033 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28038 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28039 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28040 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28043 \begin_layout Standard
28044 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28045 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28046 a bold font for all index entries.
28047 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28059 documentation for details,
28060 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28062 key "makeindex,xindy"
28069 \begin_layout Subsection
28071 \begin_inset Index idx
28074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28081 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28083 name "sub:Index-Program"
28090 \begin_layout Standard
28091 If the index generation program
28095 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28099 , the program that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
28103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28108 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28109 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28110 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28111 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28112 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28122 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
28123 dialog, see section
28124 \begin_inset space ~
28128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28130 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
28135 The available options are listed and explained in
28136 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28138 key "makeindex,xindy"
28143 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28147 \begin_layout Standard
28148 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28149 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
28152 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28153 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28157 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28158 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28161 \begin_layout Subsection
28165 \begin_layout Standard
28166 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28167 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28175 next to the standard index.
28176 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28177 that add this feature.
28183 \begin_inset Index idx
28186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28187 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
28192 package to generate multiple indexes.
28193 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
28197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28198 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
28199 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28206 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
28207 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28208 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28216 \begin_layout Standard
28217 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28219 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28220 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28223 and select the option
28225 Use multiple Indexes
28232 already contains the standard index
28233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28241 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28242 also appear as a heading) to the
28246 input field and press the
28251 The new index now also appears in the list.
28252 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
28256 \begin_layout Standard
28257 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28260 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28267 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28268 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28269 are additional features:
28272 \begin_layout Itemize
28273 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28274 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28277 \begin_layout Itemize
28278 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28279 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28287 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28288 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28289 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28290 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28293 \begin_layout Section
28294 Nomenclature/Glossary
28295 \begin_inset Index idx
28298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28305 \begin_inset Index idx
28308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28339 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28346 \begin_layout Standard
28347 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28348 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28349 called nomenclature or glossary.
28352 \begin_layout Standard
28353 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the LaTeX package
28359 \begin_inset Index idx
28362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28363 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
28369 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
28370 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28376 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
28379 \begin_layout Standard
28380 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28381 and then use the menu
28383 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28389 \begin_inset space ~
28394 or the toolbar button
28397 arg "nomencl-insert"
28402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28413 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28416 \begin_layout Standard
28417 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28418 The first is the term or
28422 that you wish to define.
28427 of the term or symbol.
28430 \begin_layout Standard
28431 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28439 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28447 \begin_layout Subsection
28448 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28449 \begin_inset Index idx
28452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28453 Nomenclature ! Layout
28461 \begin_layout Standard
28462 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28466 field as LaTeX-formulas.
28468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28472 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28480 \begin_inset Newline newline
28488 \begin_inset Newline newline
28494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28501 character starts/ends the formula.
28502 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
28504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28514 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28524 \begin_layout Standard
28525 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
28526 \begin_inset space ~
28530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28532 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28539 \begin_layout Standard
28543 \begin_inset space ~
28548 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
28549 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28554 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28561 in this document is:
28562 \begin_inset Newline newline
28567 dummy entry for the character
28572 \begin_inset Newline newline
28584 \begin_inset space ~
28594 font use the command
28623 \begin_layout Standard
28624 If the characters |
28625 \begin_inset space \space{}
28629 \begin_inset space \space{}
28633 \begin_inset space \space{}
28637 \begin_inset space \space{}
28641 \begin_inset space \space{}
28644 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28645 a quote character in front of them.
28646 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28647 LatexCommand nomenclature
28648 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28649 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28656 \begin_layout Subsection
28657 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28658 \begin_inset Index idx
28661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28662 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28670 \begin_layout Standard
28671 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
28672 the symbol definition.
28673 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28675 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28678 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28679 LatexCommand nomenclature
28681 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28688 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28692 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28693 LatexCommand nomenclature
28696 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28701 They will be sorted by
28702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28728 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28731 will be sorted before the
28735 since the character
28736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28743 is considered in sorting.
28746 \begin_layout Standard
28747 To control the sort order, you can edit the
28750 \begin_inset space ~
28755 field of the nomenclature dialog.
28756 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
28758 For the example given, you can insert
28762 in this field for the
28763 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28770 will be located before
28771 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28777 \begin_layout Standard
28778 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
28783 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28792 \begin_layout Subsection
28793 Nomenclature Options
28794 \begin_inset Index idx
28797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28798 Nomenclature ! Options
28806 \begin_layout Standard
28811 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
28812 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
28815 \begin_layout Description
28816 refeq Appends the phrase
28817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28832 to every nomenclature entry, where
28838 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
28841 \begin_layout Description
28842 refpage Appends the phrase
28843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28858 to every nomenclature entry, where
28864 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
28867 \begin_layout Description
28868 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
28871 \begin_layout Standard
28872 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
28873 class options list in the
28875 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28879 In this document the options
28886 \begin_layout Standard
28887 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28893 \begin_layout Standard
28894 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
28895 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
28900 field in the nomenclature dialog:
28903 \begin_layout Description
28913 \begin_layout Description
28916 nomrefpage Like the
28923 \begin_layout Description
28926 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
28935 \begin_layout Description
28939 \begin_inset space ~
28945 \begin_inset space ~
28950 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
28953 \begin_layout Standard
28955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28962 are automatically translated for some document languages.
28963 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
28966 \begin_layout Standard
28974 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
28977 \begin_inset Newline newline
28984 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
28989 \begin_inset Newline newline
28993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29008 by their translation.
29011 \begin_layout Subsection
29012 Printing the Nomenclature
29013 \begin_inset Index idx
29016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29017 Nomenclature ! Printing
29025 \begin_layout Standard
29026 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29028 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29029 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29045 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29046 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29047 You can choose between these settings:
29050 \begin_layout Description
29051 Default a space of 1
29052 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29058 \begin_layout Description
29060 \begin_inset space ~
29064 \begin_inset space ~
29067 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29070 \begin_layout Description
29071 Custom custom space
29074 \begin_layout Standard
29075 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29084 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29092 For example, in order to change the name to
29096 , add the following line to the preamble:
29099 \begin_layout Standard
29107 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29110 \begin_layout Subsection
29111 Nomenclature Program
29112 \begin_inset Index idx
29115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29116 Nomenclature ! Program
29122 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29124 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
29131 \begin_layout Standard
29132 LyX uses the program
29136 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29137 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29142 by adding options, see section
29143 \begin_inset space ~
29147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29149 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
29154 The available options are listed and explained in
29155 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29157 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29164 \begin_layout Section
29166 \begin_inset Index idx
29169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29176 \begin_inset Index idx
29179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29180 Document ! Branches
29186 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29188 name "sec:Branches"
29195 \begin_layout Standard
29196 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29197 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29198 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29199 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29202 \begin_layout Standard
29203 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
29204 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29205 To create a branch, either select the menu
29207 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29208 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29211 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29213 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29220 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29221 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29222 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
29223 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29224 (see below for an example).
29225 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29226 to the name of the other) and to add
29227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29235 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29239 \begin_inset space ~
29242 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29243 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29246 \begin_layout Standard
29247 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29248 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29250 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29253 where you can choose a branch.
29254 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29258 \begin_layout Standard
29259 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29260 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29263 \begin_layout Standard
29264 \begin_inset Branch Question
29267 \begin_layout Standard
29268 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29276 \begin_layout Standard
29277 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29280 \begin_layout Standard
29281 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29289 \begin_layout Standard
29296 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29297 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29300 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29301 Consider for example a file
29302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29309 which has the above branches.
29311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29318 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29342 branch were inactive,
29343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29358 branch was active, likewise
29359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29374 branch was active, and
29375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29378 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29382 if both branches were active.
29383 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29386 \begin_layout Standard
29387 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29393 \begin_layout Standard
29394 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29395 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
29397 For example you can define for the question branch
29401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29402 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
29403 \begin_inset space ~
29407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29409 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29421 \begin_layout Standard
29431 \begin_layout Standard
29441 \begin_layout Standard
29442 and for the answer branch
29445 \begin_layout Standard
29455 \begin_layout Standard
29465 \begin_layout Standard
29466 \begin_inset Branch Question
29469 \begin_layout Standard
29473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29501 \begin_layout Standard
29502 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29505 \begin_layout Standard
29509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29537 \begin_layout Standard
29538 Now it is possible to use the
29542 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29549 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29552 commands to obtain conditional output.
29553 Here is an example formula where only the
29560 \begin_inset Formula
29562 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29570 \begin_layout Standard
29571 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29579 \begin_layout Standard
29580 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29582 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29586 \begin_inset space \space{}
29589 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
29590 For this advanced usage, see the
29595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29598 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29605 \begin_layout Section
29607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29609 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29614 \begin_inset Index idx
29617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29626 \begin_layout Standard
29629 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29630 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29633 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29635 All these options are provided by the LaTeX-package
29640 \begin_inset Index idx
29643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29644 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
29649 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29650 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29651 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29652 part of the document.
29656 \begin_layout Standard
29657 The header information in the dialog tab
29661 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29662 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29663 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29664 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29668 \begin_inset space ~
29672 \begin_inset space ~
29677 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
29678 title and author entries.
29682 \begin_inset space ~
29686 \begin_inset space ~
29690 \begin_inset space ~
29695 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29698 \begin_layout Standard
29699 You can specify in the dialog tab
29703 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29708 \begin_inset space ~
29712 \begin_inset space ~
29716 \begin_inset space ~
29721 option allows long links to be split;
29724 \begin_inset space ~
29728 \begin_inset space ~
29732 \begin_inset space ~
29740 \begin_inset space ~
29745 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
29748 \begin_inset space ~
29753 colors the different links.
29754 The default colors are:
29757 \begin_layout Labeling
29758 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29763 for hyperlinks and URLs
29766 \begin_layout Labeling
29767 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29775 \begin_layout Labeling
29776 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29784 \begin_layout Standard
29785 but you can change these in the field
29790 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
29793 \begin_layout Standard
29796 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
29799 \begin_layout Standard
29804 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
29805 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
29806 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
29809 \begin_layout Standard
29814 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
29815 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
29816 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
29826 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
29827 when opening the PDF.
29829 \begin_inset space ~
29832 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
29833 \begin_inset space ~
29836 1 will only display the sections.
29839 \begin_layout Standard
29840 PDF properties are also used in this document.
29841 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
29847 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
29848 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29857 \begin_layout Section
29858 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
29859 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29861 name "sec:TeX-Code"
29868 \begin_layout Subsection
29870 \begin_inset Index idx
29873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29882 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
29889 \begin_layout Standard
29890 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
29891 constructs, but not all.
29892 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
29893 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
29894 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
29895 is a LaTeX-package for every problem, though LyX cannot support all packages
29896 and their commands.
29899 \begin_layout Standard
29900 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
29902 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
29904 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29917 \begin_inset space ~
29922 or by the toolbar button
29935 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
29943 \begin_layout Standard
29944 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
29945 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
29946 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
29947 using the LaTeX-command
29953 , you can write the command part
29959 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
29963 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
29964 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
29965 the following example:
29968 \begin_layout Standard
29969 \begin_inset Graphics
29970 filename clipart/ERT.png
29978 \begin_layout Standard
29982 \begin_layout Standard
29983 This is a line with a
29987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30010 \begin_layout Standard
30011 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30019 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30020 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
30028 \begin_layout Subsection
30029 A Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
30030 \begin_inset Argument 1
30033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30040 \begin_inset Index idx
30043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30050 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30052 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
30059 \begin_layout Standard
30060 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30061 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
30062 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
30063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30071 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30072 any time if you know the right commands.
30073 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30074 is the end of the day.
30075 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30076 all caption labels bold.
30077 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30079 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30083 \begin_layout Standard
30084 Now LaTeX comes into play.
30085 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
30086 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the LaTeX package
30088 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30097 \begin_layout Standard
30098 As result you find that the package
30103 \begin_inset Index idx
30106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30107 LaTeX-packages ! caption
30113 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30115 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30118 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
30125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30133 \begin_inset space ~
30141 \begin_layout Standard
30146 usepackage[options]{package name}
30149 \begin_layout Standard
30150 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30151 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30152 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30155 \begin_layout Standard
30156 In your case the package name is
30161 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30166 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30167 So you add the command
30170 \begin_layout Standard
30175 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30178 \begin_layout Standard
30179 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30184 For more commands provided by the
30188 package, have a look at its documentation,
30189 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30203 \begin_layout Standard
30204 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30206 For example if you use a
30210 class, you don't need the package
30214 , you can instead write
30217 \begin_layout Standard
30222 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30227 \begin_layout Standard
30228 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30229 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30230 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30237 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30240 \begin_layout Standard
30241 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30242 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30244 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
30245 the previous section.
30248 \begin_layout Standard
30249 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
30251 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30253 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30260 \begin_layout Standard
30261 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30267 \begin_layout Standard
30271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30281 \begin_inset Note Note
30284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30285 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30293 \begin_layout Left Header
30294 \begin_inset Argument 1
30297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30317 \begin_inset Note Note
30320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30321 defines the header line as described below
30329 \begin_layout Center Header
30330 \begin_inset Argument 1
30333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30342 \begin_layout Right Header
30343 \begin_inset Argument 1
30346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30367 \begin_layout Left Footer
30368 \begin_inset Argument 1
30371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30392 \begin_layout Center Footer
30393 \begin_inset Argument 1
30396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30407 \begin_inset Newline newline
30411 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30417 \begin_layout Right Footer
30418 \begin_inset Argument 1
30421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30443 \begin_layout Section
30444 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30445 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30447 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30452 \begin_inset Index idx
30455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30456 Document ! Header/Footer line
30462 \begin_inset Index idx
30465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30474 \begin_layout Standard
30475 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30479 \begin_inset space ~
30490 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30496 \begin_inset space ~
30502 As a second step add in the menu
30504 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30505 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30512 Custom Header/Footerlines
30513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30517 This module offers the following 6
30518 \begin_inset space ~
30524 \begin_layout Description
30526 \begin_inset space ~
30530 \begin_inset space ~
30534 \begin_inset space ~
30538 \begin_inset space ~
30542 \begin_inset space ~
30548 \begin_layout Description
30550 \begin_inset space ~
30554 \begin_inset space ~
30558 \begin_inset space ~
30562 \begin_inset space ~
30566 \begin_inset space ~
30572 \begin_layout Standard
30573 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30576 \begin_layout Standard
30577 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30578 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30580 \begin_inset space ~
30584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30586 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30590 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30593 \begin_layout Standard
30594 \begin_inset Float figure
30600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30603 \begin_inset Tabular
30604 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30605 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
30606 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30607 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30608 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30610 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30628 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30639 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30657 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30668 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30672 The normal text on the page goes here.
30673 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30675 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30676 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30681 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30690 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30701 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30719 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30730 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
30742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30748 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30766 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30769 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30771 name "fig:Page-layout"
30775 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
30788 \begin_layout Standard
30789 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30797 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
30801 \begin_inset space ~
30806 is set to “Default”.
30807 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
30816 \begin_layout Subsection
30820 \begin_layout Standard
30821 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
30822 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
30823 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
30824 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
30826 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
30827 Defining the footer line works similarly.
30830 \begin_layout Standard
30831 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
30834 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30847 \begin_inset space ~
30855 \begin_layout Description
30858 thepage prints the current page number
30861 \begin_layout Description
30864 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
30867 \begin_layout Description
30870 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
30873 \begin_layout Description
30876 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
30877 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
30880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30884 \begin_inset Quotes prd
30887 because it usually goes in a left header.
30890 \begin_layout Description
30893 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
30894 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
30896 It is normally used in the right header.
30899 \begin_layout Subsection
30900 Default header/footer
30903 \begin_layout Standard
30904 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
30905 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
30906 footer has the page number.
30907 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
30908 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
30909 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
30912 \begin_inset space ~
30920 \begin_layout Subsection
30924 \begin_layout Standard
30925 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
30926 Some pages are different.
30927 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
30928 a new part or chapter in your book.
30929 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
30930 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
30931 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
30934 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30935 Header and footer decoration line
30938 \begin_layout Standard
30939 By default, you get a 0.4
30940 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30943 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
30944 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
30956 in the following way:
30959 \begin_layout Standard
30966 headrulewidth}{thickness}
30969 \begin_layout Standard
30970 where thickness is a size in standard units like
30979 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
30980 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30986 \begin_layout Standard
30987 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
30988 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
30989 \begin_inset space ~
30993 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31002 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31003 Several header/footer lines
31006 \begin_layout Standard
31007 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31008 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31009 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31011 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
31025 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31026 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31039 \begin_inset space ~
31047 \begin_layout Standard
31054 headheight}{height}
31057 \begin_layout Standard
31058 where height is a size in standard units.
31059 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31060 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31061 Then open the LaTeX logfile with the menu
31063 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31080 \begin_inset space ~
31085 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31090 \begin_inset Index idx
31093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31094 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
31100 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31101 for your header/footer.
31104 \begin_layout Subsection
31108 \begin_layout Standard
31109 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31110 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31111 This example consists of the following definition:
31114 \begin_layout Description
31116 \begin_inset space ~
31125 , empty optional argument
31128 \begin_layout Description
31130 \begin_inset space ~
31133 Header empty, empty optional argument
31136 \begin_layout Description
31138 \begin_inset space ~
31147 in the optional argument
31150 \begin_layout Description
31152 \begin_inset space ~
31161 in the optional argument
31164 \begin_layout Description
31166 \begin_inset space ~
31178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31182 \begin_inset Newline newline
31186 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31193 in the optional argument
31196 \begin_layout Description
31198 \begin_inset space ~
31207 , empty optional argument
31210 \begin_layout Description
31213 headrulewidth set to 2
31214 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31220 \begin_layout Standard
31221 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31222 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31228 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31237 \begin_layout Standard
31238 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31244 \begin_layout Standard
31248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31252 pagestyle{headings}
31258 \begin_inset Note Note
31261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31262 switches back to page style with the default headings
31270 \begin_layout Section
31271 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31272 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31274 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31279 \begin_inset Index idx
31282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31289 \begin_inset Index idx
31292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31301 \begin_layout Standard
31302 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
31303 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31304 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31307 \begin_layout Subsection
31311 \begin_layout Standard
31312 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
31317 \begin_inset Index idx
31320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31321 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
31326 (on some systems named simply
31331 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
31333 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31339 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
31340 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31348 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
31349 automatically installed together with LyX.
31352 \begin_layout Subsection
31356 \begin_layout Standard
31357 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
31358 LaTeX, activate the option
31361 \begin_inset space ~
31368 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31374 \begin_inset space ~
31378 \begin_inset space ~
31381 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31388 \begin_inset space ~
31401 \begin_inset space ~
31406 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31409 \begin_layout Standard
31410 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX,
31414 \begin_inset space ~
31422 \begin_inset space ~
31430 \begin_layout Standard
31431 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
31435 \begin_layout Standard
31436 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31444 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31445 generated by activating the option
31448 \begin_inset space ~
31454 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31462 \begin_layout Subsection
31463 Selected document parts
31466 \begin_layout Standard
31467 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31468 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
31469 that are not yet supported by LyX.
31470 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31472 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31476 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31477 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31478 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31481 \begin_layout Standard
31482 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
31488 which is not yet supported by LyX.
31492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31499 is explained in section
31501 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31506 \begin_inset space ~
31516 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
31517 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
31519 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31521 Here is the result:
31524 \begin_layout Standard
31525 \begin_inset Preview
31527 \begin_layout Standard
31532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31536 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31542 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31552 height_special "totalheight"
31555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31580 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31586 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31608 \begin_layout Standard
31609 Previewing works also for colors.
31610 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
31621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31628 is explained in section
31635 \begin_inset space ~
31648 \begin_layout Standard
31649 \begin_inset Preview
31651 \begin_layout Standard
31655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31674 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31679 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31698 \begin_layout Standard
31699 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31705 \begin_layout Standard
31706 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31707 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
31708 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
31710 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
31711 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
31712 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
31713 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
31717 \begin_layout Subsection
31721 \begin_layout Standard
31722 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
31725 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31727 \begin_inset space ~
31732 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
31733 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
31735 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
31736 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
31737 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
31738 the source view window.
31743 , you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you
31744 have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates
31745 them all, not just the one which is open at the time.
31748 \begin_layout Section
31749 Advanced Find and Replace
31750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31752 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
31757 \begin_inset Index idx
31760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31767 \begin_inset Index idx
31770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31779 \begin_layout Subsection
31783 \begin_layout Standard
31784 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
31785 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
31786 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
31787 The key-features are:
31790 \begin_layout Itemize
31791 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
31792 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
31793 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
31797 \begin_layout Itemize
31798 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
31799 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
31800 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
31801 a section heading will only be found within section headings
31804 \begin_layout Itemize
31805 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
31806 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
31807 outside of mathematics environments
31810 \begin_layout Itemize
31811 Search may be widened to a specific
31816 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31820 \begin_inset space ~
31823 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
31824 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
31831 \begin_layout Itemize
31832 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
31833 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
31834 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31838 \begin_inset space ~
31841 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
31844 \begin_layout Subsection
31848 \begin_layout Standard
31849 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
31851 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31864 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
31867 ) or the toolbar button
31870 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
31876 Advanced Find and Replace
31881 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31885 \begin_layout Standard
31890 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
31894 \begin_inset space ~
31899 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
31902 arg "break-paragraph"
31906 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
31907 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
31911 arg "break-paragraph"
31914 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
31918 searches backwards.
31921 \begin_layout Standard
31925 \begin_inset space ~
31930 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
31939 \begin_inset space ~
31944 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
31947 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31948 Searching for mathematics
31951 \begin_layout Standard
31952 Mathematical formulas, such as
31953 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
31956 or something more complex like
31957 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
31960 , may be searched for by typing them in the
31965 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
31966 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
31967 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
31968 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
31974 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31978 \begin_layout Standard
31979 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
31980 This is done by switching to the
31984 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
31989 This way, entering in the
31996 \begin_layout Itemize
31997 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
31998 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32001 \begin_layout Itemize
32002 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32003 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32006 \begin_layout Itemize
32007 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32008 of it only within section headings.
32009 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32010 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32014 \begin_layout Itemize
32015 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32016 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32019 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32023 \begin_layout Standard
32024 The entries made in the
32028 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32031 \begin_inset space ~
32037 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32041 button or alternatively press
32044 arg "break-paragraph"
32051 while the cursor is in the
32054 \begin_inset space ~
32062 \begin_layout Standard
32063 You can replace with fully-featured formatted LyX entries.
32064 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32068 \begin_layout Itemize
32069 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32070 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32078 with its typewriter version
32079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32093 \begin_layout Itemize
32094 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32100 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32112 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32119 (you may want to enable the
32122 \begin_inset space ~
32130 \begin_inset space ~
32135 options and disable the
32143 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32151 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32152 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32156 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$
32159 , or occurrences of
32160 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32164 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32170 \begin_layout Subsection
32174 \begin_layout Standard
32175 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32180 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32182 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32184 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32193 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32199 This is done with the context menu
32201 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32202 Insert Regular Expression
32204 while the cursor is in the
32209 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32210 expression matching rules
32214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32215 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
32217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32221 \begin_inset space ~
32224 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
32225 to match expressions.
32230 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32231 same text in the document.
32232 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32233 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32236 \begin_layout Enumerate
32237 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32242 editor the fraction
32243 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32247 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32250 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32251 fractions with the given denominator.
32254 \begin_layout Enumerate
32255 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32267 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32272 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32273 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32274 Also, by inserting a
32275 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32278 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32279 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32282 \begin_layout Standard
32283 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32284 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32285 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32288 , and referring back to them through
32289 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32293 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32297 For example, try searching with the regexp
32298 \begin_inset Newline newline
32301 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32304 \begin_inset Newline newline
32307 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32310 \begin_layout Standard
32311 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32314 \begin_layout Standard
32315 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32323 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32324 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32325 sub-expressions is absolute.
32327 \begin_inset space ~
32331 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32334 always refers to the first occurrence of
32335 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32338 in all entered regexps.
32346 \begin_layout Section
32348 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32350 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32355 \begin_inset Index idx
32358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32367 \begin_layout Standard
32368 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
32371 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32378 key or the toolbar button
32381 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32384 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32385 beginning of the currently selected text.
32386 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32387 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32388 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32389 scrolled so that it is visible.
32390 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32391 n, if any could be found.
32392 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32396 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32397 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32400 \begin_layout Standard
32401 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32404 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32408 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32409 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32410 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32411 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32414 \begin_inset space ~
32422 arg "dialog-show character"
32425 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32426 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32429 \begin_layout Standard
32430 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
32431 \begin_inset Newline newline
32435 \begin_inset Flex URL
32438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32440 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32446 \begin_inset Newline newline
32450 \begin_inset space ~
32453 files for each language.
32454 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32455 \begin_inset space ~
32458 files into LyX's installation subfolder
32467 \begin_inset Newline newline
32470 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32471 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32472 but in most cases these are
32488 is the language code.
32491 \begin_layout Subsection
32495 \begin_layout Standard
32498 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32499 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32501 \begin_inset space ~
32504 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32507 you can set the following things:
32510 \begin_layout Description
32512 \begin_inset space ~
32515 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
32516 Depending on your platform,
32530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32531 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32532 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32547 \begin_layout Description
32549 \begin_inset space ~
32552 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
32553 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32556 \begin_layout Description
32558 \begin_inset space ~
32561 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32563 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32567 \begin_inset space \space{}
32571 This should normally not be needed.
32574 \begin_layout Description
32576 \begin_inset space ~
32580 \begin_inset space ~
32583 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32595 \begin_layout Description
32597 \begin_inset space ~
32600 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32601 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32602 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32603 appear in a context menu.
32604 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32608 \begin_layout Description
32610 \begin_inset space ~
32614 \begin_inset space ~
32618 \begin_inset space ~
32621 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32625 \begin_layout Section
32627 \begin_inset Index idx
32630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32639 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32646 \begin_layout Standard
32647 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32648 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32658 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32660 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32669 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
32670 Therefore, LyX is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32671 which are available for many languages.
32674 \begin_layout Standard
32675 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32679 \begin_layout Subsection
32680 Setting up the thesaurus
32683 \begin_layout Standard
32692 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32696 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32701 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32703 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32707 \begin_inset space ~
32715 For instance, the US English files are named:
32718 \begin_layout Itemize
32722 \begin_layout Itemize
32726 \begin_layout Standard
32735 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
32736 and you just need to point LyX (in
32738 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32739 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32740 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32742 \begin_inset space ~
32747 ) to the path where they are installed.
32751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32752 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
32753 ies, typical locations are
32759 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
32763 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
32767 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
32770 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
32776 LibreOffice-<Version>
32783 On the Mac, the default location is
32785 /Users\SpecialChar \slash{}
32786 <user name>\SpecialChar \slash{}
32787 Library\SpecialChar \slash{}
32788 Application Support\SpecialChar \slash{}
32789 libreoffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
32790 <version>\SpecialChar \slash{}
32798 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
32799 during the LyX installation process, which will then be installed in the
32800 correct place right away.
32803 \begin_layout Standard
32804 If you want to install new\SpecialChar \slash{}
32805 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
32809 \begin_layout Itemize
32810 \begin_inset Flex URL
32813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32815 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
32823 \begin_layout Standard
32824 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
32825 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
32827 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32828 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32829 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32831 \begin_inset space ~
32837 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
32838 and point LyX there.
32841 \begin_layout Standard
32842 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
32844 LibreOffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
32847 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
32853 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
32856 If you do this, make sure that LyX is able to find the installed dictionaries,
32858 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32864 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32865 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32866 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32868 \begin_inset space ~
32873 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
32876 \begin_layout Subsection
32877 Using the thesaurus
32880 \begin_layout Standard
32881 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
32883 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32886 or the toolbar button
32889 arg "thesaurus-entry"
32892 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
32894 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
32896 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
32897 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
32898 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
32907 ), related terms (such as
32910 \begin_inset space ~
32919 ), compounds (such as
32922 \begin_inset space ~
32931 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
32940 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
32943 \begin_layout Standard
32944 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
32945 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
32949 \begin_layout Standard
32950 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
32951 the dictionary, such as the above
32955 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
32956 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32960 \begin_inset space \space{}
32963 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
32964 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
32965 For example, looking up the word form
32969 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
32974 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
32975 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32979 \begin_inset space \space{}
32990 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
32991 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
32992 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
32995 \begin_layout Section
32997 \begin_inset Index idx
33000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33007 \begin_inset Index idx
33010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33011 Document ! Change Tracking
33017 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33019 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33026 \begin_layout Standard
33027 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33028 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33029 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33030 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33032 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33034 \begin_inset space ~
33037 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33039 \begin_inset space ~
33047 \begin_layout Standard
33048 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33062 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33063 You can change the color in
33065 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33066 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33068 \begin_inset space ~
33072 \begin_inset space ~
33077 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
33083 \begin_inset Index idx
33086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33087 Color ! Change tracking
33092 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
33093 the cursor is in changed text.
33094 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33097 arg "changes-merge"
33103 \begin_layout Standard
33104 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
33105 \begin_inset Index idx
33108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33117 \begin_layout Standard
33118 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33124 \begin_layout Standard
33125 \begin_inset Graphics
33126 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33134 \begin_layout Standard
33135 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33141 \begin_layout Standard
33142 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33145 \begin_layout Standard
33146 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33152 \begin_layout Standard
33153 \begin_inset Tabular
33154 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33155 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33156 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33157 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33158 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33167 arg "changes-track"
33175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33181 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33183 \begin_inset space ~
33186 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33188 \begin_inset space ~
33197 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33206 arg "changes-output"
33214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33220 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33222 \begin_inset space ~
33225 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33227 \begin_inset space ~
33231 \begin_inset space ~
33235 \begin_inset space ~
33244 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33265 Jumps to the next change
33271 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33280 arg "change-accept"
33288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33294 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33296 \begin_inset space ~
33299 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33301 \begin_inset space ~
33310 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33319 arg "change-reject"
33327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33333 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33335 \begin_inset space ~
33338 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33340 \begin_inset space ~
33349 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33358 arg "changes-merge"
33366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33372 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33374 \begin_inset space ~
33377 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33379 \begin_inset space ~
33388 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33397 arg "all-changes-accept"
33405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33411 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33413 \begin_inset space ~
33416 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33418 \begin_inset space ~
33422 \begin_inset space ~
33431 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33440 arg "all-changes-reject"
33448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33454 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33456 \begin_inset space ~
33459 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33461 \begin_inset space ~
33465 \begin_inset space ~
33474 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33497 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33498 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33511 \begin_inset space ~
33520 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33543 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33545 \begin_inset space ~
33561 \begin_layout Standard
33562 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33568 \begin_layout Standard
33569 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33589 \begin_layout Standard
33590 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33591 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33592 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33593 the next change after the current cursor position.
33594 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33595 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33596 step to the next change.
33597 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33600 \begin_layout Standard
33601 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33602 to describe a change.
33605 \begin_layout Standard
33606 To show the changes made in the output you need the LaTeX package
33611 \begin_inset Index idx
33614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33615 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
33621 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
33622 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33628 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
33631 \begin_layout Section
33632 Comparison of Documents
33633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33635 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33640 \begin_inset Index idx
33643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33644 Comparison of documents
33652 \begin_layout Standard
33653 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
33655 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33659 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
33661 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
33662 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33666 \begin_inset space ~
33670 \begin_inset space ~
33674 \begin_inset space ~
33683 \begin_inset space ~
33687 \begin_inset space ~
33691 \begin_inset space ~
33695 \begin_inset space ~
33699 \begin_inset space ~
33703 \begin_inset space ~
33708 enables the change tracking option
33711 \begin_inset space ~
33715 \begin_inset space ~
33719 \begin_inset space ~
33724 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
33727 \begin_layout Section
33728 International Support
33729 \begin_inset Index idx
33732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33733 International support
33741 \begin_layout Standard
33742 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
33743 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
33744 up LyX to use them:
33745 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33747 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
33754 \begin_layout Standard
33755 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
33756 \begin_inset space ~
33760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33762 reference "sub:Special-Character"
33769 \begin_layout Subsection
33771 \begin_inset Index idx
33774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33781 \begin_inset Index idx
33784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33785 Document ! Settings
33791 \begin_inset Index idx
33794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33795 Document ! Language
33803 \begin_layout Standard
33806 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33807 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33810 dialog lets you set
33812 the language, the quote style and character encoding
33817 \begin_layout Standard
33822 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
33826 \begin_inset space ~
33831 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
33832 For details about the different encoding options see section
33833 \begin_inset space ~
33837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33839 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
33846 \begin_layout Subsection
33847 Keyboard mapping configuration
33848 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33850 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
33857 \begin_layout Standard
33858 If you have for example a U.
33859 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33862 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
33863 can use an alternate keymap.
33864 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
33865 use an Italian keymap.
33868 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33869 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33870 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33873 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
33874 \begin_inset space ~
33878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33880 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
33885 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
33886 which one you want to use.
33889 \begin_layout Standard
33890 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
33891 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
33892 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
33893 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33896 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
33897 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
33898 one to support the characters you want.
33899 This and many other customizations are explained in the
33906 \begin_layout Chapter
33909 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33911 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
33918 \begin_layout Standard
33919 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
33920 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
33921 topic inside the user's guide.
33924 \begin_layout Section
33926 \begin_inset Index idx
33929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33938 \begin_layout Standard
33943 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
33946 \begin_layout Subsection
33950 \begin_layout Standard
33951 Creates a new document.
33954 \begin_layout Subsection
33958 \begin_layout Standard
33959 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
33960 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
33961 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
33964 \begin_layout Subsection
33968 \begin_layout Standard
33972 \begin_layout Subsection
33976 \begin_layout Standard
33977 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
33978 Click there on a file to open it.
33981 \begin_layout Subsection
33985 \begin_layout Standard
33986 Closes the current document.
33989 \begin_layout Subsection
33993 \begin_layout Standard
33994 Closes all opened documents.
33997 \begin_layout Subsection
34001 \begin_layout Standard
34002 Saves the actual document.
34005 \begin_layout Subsection
34009 \begin_layout Standard
34010 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34013 \begin_layout Subsection
34017 \begin_layout Standard
34018 Saves all opened documents.
34021 \begin_layout Subsection
34025 \begin_layout Standard
34026 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34029 \begin_layout Subsection
34033 \begin_layout Standard
34034 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34035 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34036 It is described in the section
34038 Version Control in LyX
34042 Additional Features
34047 \begin_layout Subsection
34051 \begin_layout Standard
34052 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
34053 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
34055 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
34058 \begin_layout Standard
34059 When using the menu entry
34062 \begin_inset space ~
34067 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34071 \begin_inset space ~
34075 \begin_inset space ~
34079 \begin_inset space ~
34084 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34085 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34088 \begin_layout Subsection
34090 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34099 \begin_layout Standard
34100 You can export your document to various file formats.
34101 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
34102 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34103 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
34106 \begin_layout Standard
34107 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34109 \begin_inset space ~
34113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34115 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
34122 \begin_layout Description
34128 \begin_inset space ~
34135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34142 yX format of the special LyX
34143 \begin_inset space ~
34146 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34147 \begin_inset Newline newline
34150 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into LyX.
34153 \begin_layout Description
34154 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34160 \begin_layout Description
34162 \begin_inset space ~
34165 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34171 \begin_layout Description
34172 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
34173 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34174 files paths or file names in your document.
34175 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34182 \begin_layout Description
34183 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34184 in files paths or file names
34187 \begin_layout Description
34189 \begin_inset space ~
34196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34203 eX) DVI-format using the program
34207 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
34210 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34218 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34226 \begin_layout Description
34228 \begin_inset space ~
34231 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34235 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34240 \begin_layout Description
34241 HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not
34245 \begin_layout Description
34247 \begin_inset space ~
34251 \begin_inset space ~
34254 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34258 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34266 \begin_layout Description
34273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34281 \begin_inset space ~
34292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34305 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34310 \begin_layout Description
34317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34325 \begin_inset space ~
34330 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
34331 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34335 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34338 \begin_layout Description
34345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34353 \begin_inset space ~
34358 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
34359 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
34367 \begin_layout Description
34374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34382 \begin_inset space ~
34393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34406 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34411 \begin_layout Description
34413 \begin_inset space ~
34417 \begin_inset space ~
34426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34435 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
34436 music notation software
34441 \begin_layout Description
34448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34458 \begin_inset space ~
34462 \begin_inset space ~
34465 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34466 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34467 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
34470 \begin_layout Description
34477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34487 \begin_inset space ~
34490 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (
34491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34506 represent the version number)
34509 \begin_layout Description
34516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34525 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
34528 \begin_layout Description
34529 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34534 \begin_layout Description
34535 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34537 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34540 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34544 \begin_layout Description
34548 \begin_inset space ~
34553 PDF-format using the program
34557 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34560 \begin_layout Description
34564 \begin_inset space ~
34571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34580 PDF-format using the program
34584 , produces PDF-files directly
34587 \begin_layout Description
34591 \begin_inset space ~
34596 PDF-format using the program
34600 , produces PDF-files directly
34603 \begin_layout Description
34607 \begin_inset space ~
34612 PDF-format using the program
34616 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34619 \begin_layout Description
34623 \begin_inset space ~
34630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34639 PDF-format using the program
34643 , produces PDF-files directly
34646 \begin_layout Description
34650 \begin_inset space ~
34658 \begin_layout Description
34662 \begin_inset space ~
34666 \begin_inset space ~
34671 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
34672 and then exported as text using the program
34677 \begin_layout Description
34682 PostScript format using the program
34687 \begin_layout Description
34688 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
34689 programming language
34702 it is possible to use
34709 \begin_layout Standard
34710 If one of the menu entries
34717 \begin_inset space ~
34726 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
34727 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
34728 \begin_inset space ~
34732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34734 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
34739 \begin_inset Index idx
34742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34743 Reconfiguration of LyX
34751 \begin_layout Subsection
34755 \begin_layout Standard
34756 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
34757 format or send it to a printer.
34758 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
34759 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
34765 For more information have a look at section
34766 \begin_inset space ~
34770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34772 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
34779 \begin_layout Subsection
34783 \begin_layout Standard
34784 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
34785 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
34786 prefix, see section
34787 \begin_inset space ~
34791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34793 reference "sec:Paths"
34798 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
34807 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
34808 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
34809 \begin_inset space ~
34813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34815 reference "sub:Converters"
34822 \begin_layout Subsection
34823 New and Close Window
34826 \begin_layout Standard
34827 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
34830 \begin_layout Subsection
34834 \begin_layout Standard
34835 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
34838 \begin_layout Section
34840 \begin_inset Index idx
34843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34852 \begin_layout Subsection
34856 \begin_layout Standard
34857 Described in section
34858 \begin_inset space ~
34862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34864 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
34871 \begin_layout Subsection
34872 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
34875 \begin_layout Standard
34876 Described in section
34877 \begin_inset space ~
34881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34883 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34890 \begin_layout Subsection
34894 \begin_layout Standard
34895 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
34896 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
34899 \begin_layout Subsection
34903 \begin_layout Standard
34904 Selects the whole document.
34907 \begin_layout Subsection
34908 Find & Replace (Quick)
34911 \begin_layout Standard
34912 Described in section
34913 \begin_inset space ~
34917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34919 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34926 \begin_layout Subsection
34927 Find & Replace (Advanced)
34930 \begin_layout Standard
34931 Described in section
34932 \begin_inset space ~
34936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34938 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34945 \begin_layout Subsection
34946 Move Paragraph Up/Down
34949 \begin_layout Standard
34950 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
34954 \begin_layout Subsection
34958 \begin_layout Standard
34959 Described in section
34960 \begin_inset space ~
34964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34966 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
34973 \begin_layout Subsection
34975 \begin_inset Index idx
34978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34979 Paragraph ! Settings
34987 \begin_layout Standard
34988 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
34989 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
34993 \begin_layout Standard
34994 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
34995 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35001 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35002 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35004 \begin_inset space ~
35012 \begin_layout Subsection
35016 \begin_layout Standard
35017 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35018 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35019 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35023 \begin_layout Standard
35024 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35026 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35027 The properties of tables are described in section
35028 \begin_inset space ~
35032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35034 reference "sec:Tables"
35038 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35039 \begin_inset space ~
35043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35045 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35052 \begin_layout Subsection
35053 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35056 \begin_layout Standard
35057 These menu entries are only active if the cursor is in an environment that
35059 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35060 \begin_inset space ~
35064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35066 reference "sec:Nesting"
35071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35073 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
35080 \begin_layout Section
35082 \begin_inset Index idx
35085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35094 \begin_layout Standard
35095 At the bottom of the
35099 menu the opened documents are listed.
35102 \begin_layout Subsection
35103 Open/Close all Insets
35106 \begin_layout Standard
35107 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35110 \begin_layout Subsection
35111 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35114 \begin_layout Standard
35115 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35118 \begin_layout Standard
35119 Math macros are described in the
35126 \begin_layout Subsection
35130 \begin_layout Standard
35131 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35132 \begin_inset space ~
35136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35138 reference "sec:Navigating"
35143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35145 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
35152 \begin_layout Subsection
35156 \begin_layout Standard
35157 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35159 \begin_inset space ~
35163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35165 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35172 \begin_layout Subsection
35176 \begin_layout Standard
35177 Opens a window showing console messages.
35178 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
35179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35182 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35183 while LaTeX is processing the document.
35186 \begin_layout Subsection
35188 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35190 name "sub:Toolbars"
35195 \begin_inset Index idx
35198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35207 \begin_layout Standard
35208 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35209 All toolbars and the
35212 \begin_inset space ~
35217 can be turned on and off.
35222 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35234 \begin_inset space ~
35246 \begin_inset space ~
35251 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35255 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35262 \begin_layout Standard
35267 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35271 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35272 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35273 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35274 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35275 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35278 \begin_layout Standard
35279 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35280 \begin_inset space ~
35284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35286 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35293 \begin_layout Subsection
35297 \begin_layout Standard
35301 \begin_inset space ~
35305 \begin_inset space ~
35309 \begin_inset space ~
35313 \begin_inset space ~
35317 \begin_inset space ~
35321 \begin_inset space ~
35326 will split LyX's main window vertically while
35329 \begin_inset space ~
35333 \begin_inset space ~
35337 \begin_inset space ~
35341 \begin_inset space ~
35345 \begin_inset space ~
35349 \begin_inset space ~
35354 will split it horizontally.
35355 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35356 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35357 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35358 three or more documents at the same time.
35359 To close a split view, use the menu
35362 \begin_inset space ~
35366 \begin_inset space ~
35374 \begin_layout Subsection
35378 \begin_layout Standard
35379 Closes a split view.
35382 \begin_layout Subsection
35386 \begin_layout Standard
35387 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35388 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35389 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
35390 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35391 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35394 \begin_layout Section
35396 \begin_inset Index idx
35399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35408 \begin_layout Subsection
35412 \begin_layout Standard
35413 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35414 \begin_inset space ~
35418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35420 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35431 \begin_layout Subsection
35433 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35435 name "sub:Special-Character"
35442 \begin_layout Standard
35443 Here you can insert the following characters:
35446 \begin_layout Description
35451 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35453 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35454 the available characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
35455 You can get a complete display by checking
35458 \begin_inset space ~
35464 \begin_inset Newline newline
35468 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35476 Not all characters will be visible in the
35480 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35482 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35488 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
35492 ) can display every character.
35500 \begin_layout Description
35501 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
35505 \begin_layout Description
35507 \begin_inset space ~
35511 \begin_inset space ~
35514 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35515 \begin_inset space ~
35519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35521 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
35528 \begin_layout Description
35530 \begin_inset space ~
35533 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35536 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35537 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35543 \begin_layout Description
35545 \begin_inset space ~
35548 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35551 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35552 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35558 \begin_layout Description
35560 \begin_inset space ~
35563 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
35567 \begin_layout Description
35569 \begin_inset space ~
35572 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
35576 \begin_layout Description
35578 \begin_inset space ~
35581 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35587 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35593 \begin_layout Description
35595 \begin_inset space ~
35598 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
35602 \begin_layout Description
35604 \begin_inset space ~
35608 \begin_inset Index idx
35611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35618 \begin_inset Index idx
35621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35622 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35627 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35628 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
35630 To use this feature you must have the LaTeX-package
35635 \begin_inset Index idx
35638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35639 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
35645 \begin_inset Newline newline
35648 More information about this feature can be found in the
35654 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35660 \begin_layout Subsection
35664 \begin_layout Standard
35665 Opens a submenu with the following options:
35668 \begin_layout Description
35669 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
35670 \begin_inset script superscript
35672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35681 \begin_layout Description
35682 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
35683 \begin_inset script subscript
35685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35694 \begin_layout Description
35696 \begin_inset space ~
35699 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
35700 \begin_inset space ~
35704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35706 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
35713 \begin_layout Description
35715 \begin_inset space ~
35718 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
35719 \begin_inset space ~
35723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35725 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
35732 \begin_layout Description
35734 \begin_inset space ~
35737 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
35738 \begin_inset space ~
35742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35744 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
35751 \begin_layout Description
35753 \begin_inset space ~
35756 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
35758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35762 \begin_inset space \space{}
35765 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
35766 An example from the LyX
35771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35774 To insert a fraction use the command
35779 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35783 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
35789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35792 The visible space is hereby the character before the
35799 \begin_layout Description
35801 \begin_inset space ~
35804 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
35805 \begin_inset space ~
35809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35811 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
35818 \begin_layout Description
35820 \begin_inset space ~
35823 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
35824 \begin_inset space ~
35828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35830 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
35837 \begin_layout Description
35839 \begin_inset space ~
35842 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
35843 \begin_inset space ~
35847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35849 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
35856 \begin_layout Description
35857 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
35858 \begin_inset space ~
35862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35864 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
35871 \begin_layout Description
35873 \begin_inset space ~
35876 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
35877 \begin_inset space ~
35881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35883 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
35890 \begin_layout Description
35892 \begin_inset space ~
35895 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
35896 \begin_inset space ~
35900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35902 reference "sub:Ligatures"
35909 \begin_layout Description
35911 \begin_inset space ~
35915 \begin_inset space ~
35918 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
35919 \begin_inset space ~
35923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35925 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35932 \begin_layout Description
35934 \begin_inset space ~
35937 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
35938 as described in section
35939 \begin_inset space ~
35943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35945 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35952 \begin_layout Description
35954 \begin_inset space ~
35957 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
35958 \begin_inset space ~
35962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35964 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35971 \begin_layout Description
35973 \begin_inset space ~
35976 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
35977 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
35979 \begin_inset space ~
35983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35985 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35992 \begin_layout Description
35994 \begin_inset space ~
35997 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
35998 \begin_inset space ~
36002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36004 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36011 \begin_layout Description
36013 \begin_inset space ~
36017 \begin_inset space ~
36020 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36021 \begin_inset space ~
36025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36027 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36034 \begin_layout Subsection
36038 \begin_layout Standard
36039 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36043 \begin_inset space ~
36064 are described in section
36065 \begin_inset space ~
36069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36071 reference "sec:toc"
36080 is described in section
36081 \begin_inset space ~
36085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36087 reference "sec:Index"
36095 is described in section
36096 \begin_inset space ~
36100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36102 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36108 BibTeX Bibliography
36110 is described in section
36111 \begin_inset space ~
36115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36117 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
36124 \begin_layout Subsection
36128 \begin_layout Standard
36129 To insert floats, as described in section
36130 \begin_inset space ~
36134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36136 reference "sec:Floats"
36140 and in detail the chapter
36147 \begin_inset space ~
36155 \begin_layout Subsection
36159 \begin_layout Standard
36160 To insert notes, described in section
36161 \begin_inset space ~
36165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36167 reference "sec:Notes"
36174 \begin_layout Subsection
36178 \begin_layout Standard
36179 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36181 Branches are described in section
36182 \begin_inset space ~
36186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36188 reference "sec:Branches"
36195 \begin_layout Subsection
36199 \begin_layout Standard
36200 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36201 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36203 An example is the document class
36204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36211 with three custom insets.
36214 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36218 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36224 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36227 \begin_layout Subsection
36229 \begin_inset Index idx
36232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36241 \begin_layout Standard
36242 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36244 For more information see chapter
36246 External Document Parts
36249 \begin_inset space ~
36255 \begin_layout Subsection
36257 \begin_inset Index idx
36260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36269 \begin_layout Standard
36270 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36271 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36278 \begin_inset space ~
36286 \begin_layout Subsection
36290 \begin_layout Standard
36295 dialog as described in section
36296 \begin_inset space ~
36300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36302 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36309 \begin_layout Subsection
36313 \begin_layout Standard
36318 as described in section
36319 \begin_inset space ~
36323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36325 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36332 \begin_layout Subsection
36336 \begin_layout Standard
36341 as described in section
36342 \begin_inset space ~
36346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36348 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36355 \begin_layout Subsection
36357 \begin_inset Index idx
36360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36367 \begin_inset Index idx
36370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36371 Longtables ! Caption
36379 \begin_layout Standard
36380 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36381 Floats are described in section
36382 \begin_inset space ~
36386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36388 reference "sec:Floats"
36392 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36399 \begin_inset space ~
36407 \begin_layout Subsection
36411 \begin_layout Standard
36412 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36413 \begin_inset space ~
36417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36419 reference "sec:Index"
36426 \begin_layout Subsection
36430 \begin_layout Standard
36431 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36432 \begin_inset space ~
36436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36438 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36445 \begin_layout Subsection
36449 \begin_layout Standard
36450 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36451 Tables are described in section
36452 \begin_inset space ~
36456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36458 reference "sec:Tables"
36462 and in detail in the chapter
36469 \begin_inset space ~
36477 \begin_layout Subsection
36481 \begin_layout Standard
36487 Graphics are described in section
36488 \begin_inset space ~
36492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36494 reference "sec:Graphics"
36501 \begin_layout Subsection
36505 \begin_layout Standard
36506 Inserts a URL as described in section
36507 \begin_inset space ~
36511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36513 reference "sub:URLs"
36520 \begin_layout Subsection
36524 \begin_layout Standard
36525 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36526 \begin_inset space ~
36530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36532 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
36539 \begin_layout Subsection
36543 \begin_layout Standard
36544 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36545 \begin_inset space ~
36549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36551 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36558 \begin_layout Subsection
36562 \begin_layout Standard
36563 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36564 \begin_inset space ~
36568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36570 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36577 \begin_layout Subsection
36581 \begin_layout Standard
36582 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36583 title or caption of a float.
36584 Inserts a short title as described in section
36585 \begin_inset space ~
36589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36591 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36598 \begin_layout Subsection
36602 \begin_layout Standard
36603 Inserts a TeX Code box as described in section
36604 \begin_inset space ~
36608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36610 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36617 \begin_layout Subsection
36619 \begin_inset Index idx
36622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36631 \begin_layout Standard
36632 Inserts a program listings box.
36633 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36635 Program Code Listings
36640 \begin_inset space ~
36648 \begin_layout Subsection
36652 \begin_layout Standard
36653 Inserts the actual date.
36654 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36656 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
36664 \begin_inset space ~
36672 \begin_layout Subsection
36676 \begin_layout Standard
36677 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
36678 \begin_inset space ~
36682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36684 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36691 \begin_layout Section
36693 \begin_inset Index idx
36696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36705 \begin_layout Standard
36706 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
36707 \begin_inset space ~
36710 of the current document.
36711 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
36714 \begin_layout Subsection
36718 \begin_layout Standard
36719 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
36720 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
36721 to jump, for example, between section
36722 \begin_inset space ~
36726 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
36727 \begin_inset space ~
36730 2.5 and use the submenu
36733 \begin_inset space ~
36737 \begin_inset space ~
36744 \begin_inset space ~
36750 \begin_inset space ~
36754 \begin_inset space ~
36760 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
36764 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
36770 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
36773 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
36776 \begin_layout Standard
36777 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
36781 \begin_inset space ~
36786 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
36789 \begin_inset space ~
36794 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
36797 \begin_layout Subsection
36798 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
36801 \begin_layout Standard
36802 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
36806 \begin_layout Subsection
36810 \begin_layout Standard
36811 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
36812 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
36813 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
36817 \begin_inset space ~
36821 \begin_inset space ~
36829 \begin_layout Subsection
36833 \begin_layout Standard
36834 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
36837 The LyX Server\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36839 \begin_inset space ~
36847 \begin_inset space ~
36852 manual for a detailed description.
36855 \begin_layout Section
36857 \begin_inset Index idx
36860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36869 \begin_layout Subsection
36873 \begin_layout Standard
36874 Change Tracking is described in section
36875 \begin_inset space ~
36879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36881 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
36888 \begin_layout Subsection
36893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36903 \begin_layout Standard
36904 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
36906 It shows the logfile of the LaTeX-program used.
36907 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
36908 to the clipboard or update the view.
36909 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
36912 \begin_layout Subsection
36913 Start Appendix Here
36916 \begin_layout Standard
36917 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
36918 as described in section
36919 \begin_inset space ~
36923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36925 reference "sec:Appendices"
36932 \begin_layout Subsection
36934 \begin_inset space ~
36940 \begin_layout Standard
36941 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
36942 default output format for the document (menu
36944 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36945 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36946 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36948 \begin_inset space ~
36952 \begin_inset space ~
36958 \begin_inset space ~
36962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36964 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
36968 ) or in the LyX preferences (menu
36970 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36971 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36973 \begin_inset space ~
36976 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36978 \begin_inset space ~
36981 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36983 \begin_inset space ~
36987 \begin_inset space ~
36993 \begin_inset space ~
36997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36999 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37003 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37004 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37006 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37007 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37009 \begin_inset space ~
37012 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37014 \begin_inset space ~
37017 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37021 \begin_inset space ~
37025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37027 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37032 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37033 The default output format is
37036 \begin_inset space ~
37044 \begin_layout Subsection
37045 View (Other Formats)
37048 \begin_layout Standard
37049 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37050 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37051 actual document with an external program.
37052 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37053 the LaTeX programs that are found when LyX was configured.
37054 All possible formats are listed in section
37055 \begin_inset space ~
37059 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37061 reference "sub:Export"
37066 You should at least see the menu entry
37071 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
37072 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX (see section
37073 \begin_inset space ~
37077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37079 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37084 \begin_inset Index idx
37087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37088 Reconfiguration of LyX
37096 \begin_layout Standard
37097 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37098 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37100 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37101 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37103 \begin_inset space ~
37106 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37108 \begin_inset space ~
37111 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37115 \begin_inset space ~
37119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37121 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37126 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37129 \begin_layout Subsection
37131 \begin_inset space ~
37137 \begin_layout Standard
37138 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37139 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37142 \begin_layout Subsection
37143 Update (Other Formats)
37146 \begin_layout Standard
37147 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37148 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37151 \begin_layout Subsection
37152 View Master Document
37155 \begin_layout Standard
37156 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37172 \begin_inset space ~
37177 manual for more information on this topic).
37178 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37179 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37183 \begin_inset space ~
37187 \begin_inset space ~
37192 generates the output of the whole book, while
37196 will just output the chapter alone.
37199 \begin_layout Standard
37200 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37201 in the document settings (menu
37203 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37204 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37205 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37207 \begin_inset space ~
37211 \begin_inset space ~
37217 \begin_inset space ~
37221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37223 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37227 ) or in the preferences (menu
37229 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37230 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37232 \begin_inset space ~
37235 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37237 \begin_inset space ~
37240 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37242 \begin_inset space ~
37246 \begin_inset space ~
37252 \begin_inset space ~
37256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37258 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37265 \begin_layout Subsection
37266 Update Master Document
37269 \begin_layout Standard
37270 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37286 \begin_inset space ~
37291 manual for more information on this topic).
37292 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37293 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37296 \begin_layout Standard
37297 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37298 in the document settings (menu
37300 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37301 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37302 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37304 \begin_inset space ~
37308 \begin_inset space ~
37314 \begin_inset space ~
37318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37320 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37324 ) or in the preferences (menu
37326 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37327 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37329 \begin_inset space ~
37332 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37334 \begin_inset space ~
37337 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37339 \begin_inset space ~
37343 \begin_inset space ~
37349 \begin_inset space ~
37353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37355 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37362 \begin_layout Subsection
37366 \begin_layout Standard
37367 Un/compresses the current document.
37370 \begin_layout Subsection
37374 \begin_layout Standard
37375 The document settings are described in appendix
37376 \begin_inset space ~
37380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37382 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37389 \begin_layout Section
37391 \begin_inset Index idx
37394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37403 \begin_layout Subsection
37407 \begin_layout Standard
37408 Spell checking is explained in section
37409 \begin_inset space ~
37413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37415 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37422 \begin_layout Subsection
37426 \begin_layout Standard
37427 The thesaurus is described in section
37428 \begin_inset space ~
37432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37434 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37441 \begin_layout Subsection
37443 \begin_inset Index idx
37446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37453 \begin_inset Index idx
37456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37465 \begin_layout Standard
37466 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37467 the highlighted document part.
37470 \begin_layout Subsection
37475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37483 \begin_inset Index idx
37486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37495 \begin_layout Standard
37496 Generates with the help of the program
37500 a log of possible LaTeX-errors and displays it in a dialog.
37501 This feature is not available on Windows.
37504 \begin_layout Subsection
37509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37517 \begin_inset Index idx
37520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37529 \begin_layout Standard
37530 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
37535 \begin_inset space ~
37540 to see the full filename paths.
37543 \begin_layout Subsection
37545 \begin_inset Index idx
37548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37557 \begin_layout Standard
37558 Opens a dialog to compare LyX files as described in section
37559 \begin_inset space ~
37563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37565 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37572 \begin_layout Subsection
37574 \begin_inset Index idx
37577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37578 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
37582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37589 Reconfiguration of LyX
37593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37606 \begin_inset Index idx
37609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37610 Reconfiguration of LyX
37618 \begin_layout Standard
37619 Reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages and programs it
37620 needs; see also section
37621 \begin_inset space ~
37625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37627 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37634 \begin_layout Subsection
37638 \begin_layout Standard
37643 dialog as described in detail in appendix
37644 \begin_inset space ~
37648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37650 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
37657 \begin_layout Section
37659 \begin_inset Index idx
37662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37671 \begin_layout Standard
37672 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
37674 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
37678 \begin_layout Standard
37682 \begin_inset space ~
37687 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
37688 found by LyX (see also section
37689 \begin_inset space ~
37693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37695 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
37702 \begin_layout Standard
37706 \begin_inset space ~
37713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37722 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the LyX version
37726 \begin_layout Section
37728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37730 name "sec:Toolbars"
37737 \begin_layout Standard
37738 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
37739 \begin_inset space ~
37743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37745 reference "sub:Toolbars"
37752 \begin_layout Standard
37753 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
37754 This is described in the
37756 Additional Features
37761 \begin_layout Subsection
37763 \begin_inset Index idx
37766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37775 \begin_layout Standard
37776 \begin_inset Graphics
37777 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
37785 \begin_layout Standard
37786 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37792 \begin_layout Standard
37793 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
37798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37810 \begin_inset Note Note
37813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37814 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
37819 manual for more information.
37827 \begin_layout Standard
37828 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37834 \begin_layout Standard
37835 \begin_inset Tabular
37836 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
37837 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37838 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37839 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37845 \begin_inset Graphics
37846 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
37856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37860 pull-down box for the environments
37873 \begin_layout Standard
37874 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
37880 \begin_layout Standard
37882 \begin_inset Tabular
37883 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
37884 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37885 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37886 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37887 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37910 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37917 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37940 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37947 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37970 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37977 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37986 arg "dialog-show print"
37994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38000 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38007 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38016 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38030 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38037 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38060 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38067 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38090 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38097 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38120 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38127 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38150 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38157 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38180 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38187 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38196 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38210 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38212 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38220 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38229 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38236 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38250 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38252 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38269 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38278 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38292 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38293 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38300 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38321 Emphasize text, function of the
38323 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38325 \begin_inset space ~
38328 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38337 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38358 Set text to noun style, function of the
38360 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38362 \begin_inset space ~
38365 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38374 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38383 arg "textstyle-apply"
38391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38395 Format text using the current settings in the
38397 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38399 \begin_inset space ~
38402 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38411 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38434 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38435 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38437 \begin_inset space ~
38446 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38455 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38469 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38476 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38483 arg "tabular-insert"
38491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38497 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38504 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38513 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38525 Toggle outline window on/off,
38527 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38534 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38543 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38555 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38561 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38570 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38582 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38595 \begin_layout Subsection
38597 \begin_inset Index idx
38600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38609 \begin_layout Standard
38610 \begin_inset Graphics
38611 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38619 \begin_layout Standard
38620 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38626 \begin_layout Standard
38627 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38631 \begin_layout Standard
38632 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38638 \begin_layout Standard
38639 \begin_inset Tabular
38640 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
38641 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38642 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38643 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38644 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38671 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38680 arg "layout Enumerate"
38688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38698 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38707 arg "layout Itemize"
38715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38725 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38752 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38761 arg "layout Description"
38769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38779 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38788 arg "depth-increment"
38796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38802 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38804 \begin_inset space ~
38808 \begin_inset space ~
38817 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38826 arg "depth-decrement"
38834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38840 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38842 \begin_inset space ~
38846 \begin_inset space ~
38855 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38864 arg "float-insert figure"
38872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38878 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38879 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38886 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38895 arg "float-insert table"
38903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38909 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38910 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38917 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38940 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38947 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38956 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
38964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38970 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38977 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38986 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
38994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39000 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39007 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39030 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39032 \begin_inset space ~
39041 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39050 arg "nomencl-insert"
39058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39064 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39066 \begin_inset space ~
39075 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39084 arg "footnote-insert"
39092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39098 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39105 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39114 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39128 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39130 \begin_inset space ~
39139 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39162 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39163 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39176 \begin_inset space ~
39185 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39194 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39208 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39215 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39238 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39245 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39268 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39285 \begin_inset space ~
39294 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39303 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39317 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39318 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39325 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39334 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39348 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39349 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39351 \begin_inset space ~
39360 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39369 arg "dialog-show character"
39377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39383 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39385 \begin_inset space ~
39388 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39395 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39404 arg "layout-paragraph"
39412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39418 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39420 \begin_inset space ~
39429 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39438 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39452 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39466 \begin_layout Subsection
39467 View/Update Toolbar
39468 \begin_inset Index idx
39471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39472 Toolbar ! View / Update
39480 \begin_layout Standard
39481 \begin_inset Graphics
39482 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39489 \begin_layout Standard
39490 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39496 \begin_layout Standard
39497 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39501 \begin_layout Standard
39502 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39508 \begin_layout Standard
39509 \begin_inset Tabular
39510 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39511 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39512 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39513 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39514 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39537 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39544 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39553 arg "buffer-update"
39561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39567 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39574 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39583 arg "master-buffer-view"
39591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39597 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39599 \begin_inset space ~
39608 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39617 arg "master-buffer-update"
39625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39631 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39633 \begin_inset space ~
39637 \begin_inset space ~
39646 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39655 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
39663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39669 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39670 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39671 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39672 Synchronize with Output
39678 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39683 \begin_inset Graphics
39684 filename ../images/view-others.png
39686 groupId toolbarbuttons
39697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39703 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39704 View (Other Formats)
39710 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39715 \begin_inset Graphics
39716 filename ../images/update-others.png
39718 groupId toolbarbuttons
39727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39733 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39734 Update (Other Formats)
39747 \begin_layout Standard
39748 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
39752 \begin_layout Subsection
39756 \begin_layout Standard
39757 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
39758 \begin_inset space ~
39762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39764 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39768 , the table toolbar
39769 \begin_inset Index idx
39772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39781 \begin_inset space ~
39786 manual and the math macro toolbar
39787 \begin_inset Index idx
39790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39803 \begin_layout Chapter
39804 The Document Settings
39805 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39807 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
39812 \begin_inset Index idx
39815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39816 Document ! Settings
39824 \begin_layout Standard
39828 \begin_inset space ~
39833 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
39834 is called with the menu
39836 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39840 You can save your document settings as default with the
39842 Save as Document Defaults
39844 button in any dialog.
39845 This will create a template named
39849 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
39853 \begin_layout Standard
39858 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
39859 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
39862 \begin_layout Standard
39863 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
39864 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
39865 to find the one you are looking for.
39866 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
39867 the submenus of the dialog.
39869 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39873 \begin_inset space \space{}
39877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39884 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
39885 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
39886 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
39889 \begin_layout Section
39893 \begin_layout Standard
39894 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
39896 Document classes are described in section
39897 \begin_inset space ~
39901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39903 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
39911 \begin_layout Standard
39915 \begin_inset space ~
39920 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
39924 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as a layout for a document class.
39925 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
39927 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
39936 \begin_layout Standard
39937 Some classes use special class options by default.
39938 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
39942 and you can decide to use them or not.
39943 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
39944 recommended you leave them untouched.
39949 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
39954 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
39955 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
39960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39961 When you want to use one of the following drivers
39962 \begin_inset Newline newline
39967 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
39970 \begin_inset Newline newline
39973 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
39979 \begin_inset CommandInset href
39981 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
39993 \begin_layout Standard
39998 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
39999 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
40000 document is opened without its master.
40001 This way child documents are always compilable.
40002 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40009 \begin_inset space ~
40017 \begin_layout Standard
40018 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
40028 \begin_inset Index idx
40031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40032 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
40038 \begin_inset Index idx
40041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40042 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
40047 for cross-references, see section
40048 \begin_inset space ~
40052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40054 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40061 \begin_layout Section
40065 \begin_layout Standard
40066 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40067 Please refer to the section
40070 \begin_inset space ~
40078 \begin_inset space ~
40083 manual for details.
40086 \begin_layout Section
40090 \begin_layout Standard
40091 Modules are explained in section
40092 \begin_inset space ~
40096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40098 reference "sub:Modules"
40105 \begin_layout Section
40109 \begin_layout Standard
40111 \begin_inset space ~
40115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40117 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
40124 \begin_layout Section
40128 \begin_layout Standard
40129 The document font settings are described in section
40130 \begin_inset space ~
40134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40136 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40143 \begin_layout Section
40147 \begin_layout Standard
40148 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40160 \begin_inset space ~
40165 and whether it should be a
40168 \begin_inset space ~
40173 can also be specified here.
40176 \begin_layout Standard
40177 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on
40179 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40181 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40184 \begin_layout Section
40188 \begin_layout Standard
40189 This dialog is described in sections
40190 \begin_inset space ~
40194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40196 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40203 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
40210 \begin_layout Section
40214 \begin_layout Standard
40215 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40216 \begin_inset space ~
40220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40222 reference "sub:Margins"
40229 \begin_layout Section
40231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40233 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40238 \begin_inset Index idx
40241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40242 Language ! Encoding
40250 \begin_layout Standard
40251 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40252 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
40253 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
40254 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40255 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
40256 known for a particular character).
40260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40261 The known commands are defined in a text file (
40266 You can add commands for unknown symbols to that file yourself, see the
40271 manual for details.
40279 \begin_layout Standard
40280 If you use the option
40284 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40285 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40286 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
40287 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40288 exactly one encoding.
40289 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40292 \begin_layout Standard
40293 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40294 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40295 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
40296 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40297 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
40298 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40303 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
40304 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
40305 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40306 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
40307 engines to standard LaTeX.
40308 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40309 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40312 \begin_inset space ~
40319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40331 \begin_inset space ~
40338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40350 \begin_inset space ~
40356 \begin_inset space ~
40360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40362 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
40367 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40371 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40374 \begin_layout Standard
40378 \begin_inset space ~
40383 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40393 The possible settings are:
40396 \begin_layout Description
40397 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40399 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40400 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40404 \begin_inset space ~
40408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40410 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
40417 \begin_layout Description
40418 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40419 format you will use.
40420 In many cases this will be
40425 \begin_inset Index idx
40428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40429 LaTeX-packages ! babel
40435 If the newer package
40440 \begin_inset Index idx
40443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40444 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
40449 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
40450 this package will be used instead of
40457 \begin_layout Description
40459 \begin_inset space ~
40470 would be more appropriate.
40473 \begin_layout Description
40474 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40475 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40479 (for German texts), type in
40482 \begin_inset Newline newline
40487 usepackage{ngerman}
40490 \begin_layout Description
40491 None will not use a language package.
40492 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40495 \begin_layout Standard
40496 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40499 \begin_layout Description
40501 \begin_inset space ~
40505 \begin_inset space ~
40509 \begin_inset space ~
40516 , but the LaTeX-package
40521 \begin_inset Index idx
40524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40525 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40531 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40532 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40533 languages in TeX code.
40536 \begin_layout Description
40537 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40538 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
40539 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
40542 \begin_layout Description
40544 \begin_inset space ~
40548 \begin_inset space ~
40551 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40554 \begin_layout Description
40556 \begin_inset space ~
40560 \begin_inset space ~
40563 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40566 \begin_layout Description
40568 \begin_inset space ~
40571 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40574 \begin_layout Description
40576 \begin_inset space ~
40580 \begin_inset space ~
40583 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40584 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40587 \begin_layout Description
40589 \begin_inset space ~
40593 \begin_inset space ~
40596 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40600 \begin_layout Description
40602 \begin_inset space ~
40606 \begin_inset space ~
40609 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40610 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40613 \begin_layout Description
40615 \begin_inset space ~
40619 \begin_inset space ~
40623 \begin_inset space ~
40626 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40627 \begin_inset space ~
40633 \begin_layout Description
40635 \begin_inset space ~
40639 \begin_inset space ~
40643 \begin_inset space ~
40646 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
40647 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
40650 \begin_layout Description
40652 \begin_inset space ~
40656 \begin_inset space ~
40659 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
40660 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
40661 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40662 \begin_inset space ~
40666 \begin_inset space ~
40672 \begin_layout Description
40674 \begin_inset space ~
40678 \begin_inset space ~
40681 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
40682 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
40683 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
40684 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40685 \begin_inset space ~
40689 \begin_inset space ~
40695 \begin_layout Description
40697 \begin_inset space ~
40701 \begin_inset space ~
40704 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
40707 \begin_layout Description
40709 \begin_inset space ~
40713 \begin_inset space ~
40716 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
40719 \begin_layout Description
40721 \begin_inset space ~
40725 \begin_inset space ~
40728 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
40731 \begin_layout Description
40733 \begin_inset space ~
40736 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
40739 \begin_layout Description
40741 \begin_inset space ~
40744 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
40747 \begin_layout Description
40749 \begin_inset space ~
40753 \begin_inset space ~
40756 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
40759 \begin_layout Description
40761 \begin_inset space ~
40765 \begin_inset space ~
40771 \begin_layout Description
40773 \begin_inset space ~
40777 \begin_inset space ~
40780 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
40783 \begin_layout Description
40785 \begin_inset space ~
40789 \begin_inset space ~
40795 \begin_layout Description
40797 \begin_inset space ~
40801 \begin_inset space ~
40804 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40809 \begin_inset Index idx
40812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40813 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
40818 , when using this, set the document language to
40823 \begin_layout Description
40825 \begin_inset space ~
40829 \begin_inset space ~
40832 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40836 , when using this, set the document language to
40839 \begin_inset space ~
40845 \begin_layout Description
40847 \begin_inset space ~
40851 \begin_inset space ~
40854 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40859 \begin_inset Index idx
40862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40863 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
40868 , when using this, set the document language to
40873 \begin_layout Description
40875 \begin_inset space ~
40879 \begin_inset space ~
40882 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40886 , when using this, set the document language to
40891 \begin_layout Description
40893 \begin_inset space ~
40897 \begin_inset space ~
40900 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40904 , when using this, set the document language to
40909 \begin_layout Description
40911 \begin_inset space ~
40914 (EUC-KR) for Korean
40917 \begin_layout Description
40919 \begin_inset space ~
40923 \begin_inset space ~
40927 \begin_inset space ~
40930 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
40933 \begin_layout Description
40935 \begin_inset space ~
40939 \begin_inset space ~
40943 \begin_inset space ~
40946 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
40947 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
40948 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
40951 \begin_layout Description
40953 \begin_inset space ~
40957 \begin_inset space ~
40963 \begin_layout Description
40965 \begin_inset space ~
40969 \begin_inset space ~
40972 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
40973 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
40976 \begin_layout Description
40978 \begin_inset space ~
40982 \begin_inset space ~
40985 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
40990 \begin_inset Index idx
40993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40994 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
40999 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41002 \begin_layout Description
41004 \begin_inset space ~
41008 \begin_inset space ~
41011 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41019 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
41024 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
41026 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41029 \begin_layout Description
41031 \begin_inset space ~
41035 \begin_inset space ~
41038 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41043 \begin_inset Index idx
41046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41047 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
41052 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41055 \begin_layout Description
41057 \begin_inset space ~
41060 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41065 \begin_inset Index idx
41068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41069 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
41075 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41079 \begin_layout Description
41081 \begin_inset space ~
41085 \begin_inset space ~
41089 \begin_inset space ~
41092 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41093 \begin_inset space ~
41099 \begin_layout Description
41101 \begin_inset space ~
41105 \begin_inset space ~
41109 \begin_inset space ~
41112 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41113 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41114 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41118 \begin_layout Description
41120 \begin_inset space ~
41124 \begin_inset space ~
41128 \begin_inset space ~
41131 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41132 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41135 \begin_layout Section
41137 \begin_inset Index idx
41140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41147 \begin_inset Index idx
41150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41157 \begin_inset Index idx
41160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41161 Color ! Shaded boxes
41167 \begin_inset Index idx
41170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41171 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41179 \begin_layout Standard
41180 Here you can alter the font color for the
41184 (default: black), for
41187 \begin_inset space ~
41192 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41196 (default: white) and for
41199 \begin_inset space ~
41209 sets the color back to the default.
41212 \begin_layout Standard
41213 Clicking any button showing
41221 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41222 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41223 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41224 later more quickly.
41227 \begin_layout Standard
41228 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41232 The colors are not shown within LyX, only in the output.
41234 \begin_inset space ~
41237 out note appears blue in the output.)
41245 \begin_layout Standard
41246 Note, if you change the
41249 \begin_inset space ~
41254 font color and use the option
41257 \begin_inset space ~
41262 in the document settings under
41265 \begin_inset space ~
41270 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41271 \begin_inset space ~
41275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41277 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41284 \begin_layout Standard
41285 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41291 \begin_layout Standard
41295 \begin_inset space ~
41304 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41306 \begin_inset space ~
41309 Code after a forced page break:
41312 \begin_layout Itemize
41313 For the page color:
41314 \begin_inset Newline newline
41321 pagecolor{color name}
41324 \begin_layout Itemize
41325 For the text color:
41326 \begin_inset Newline newline
41336 \begin_layout Standard
41337 You are restricted to one of
41373 unless you have defined your own color (see the
41380 \begin_inset space ~
41386 \begin_inset Newline newline
41389 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41390 names to refer to them:
41393 \begin_layout Itemize
41399 \begin_inset Newline newline
41404 page_backgroundcolor
41407 \begin_layout Itemize
41411 \begin_inset space ~
41417 \begin_inset Newline newline
41425 \begin_layout Itemize
41429 \begin_inset space ~
41435 \begin_inset Newline newline
41443 \begin_layout Itemize
41447 \begin_inset space ~
41453 \begin_inset Newline newline
41461 \begin_layout Standard
41462 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section Colored
41463 \begin_inset space ~
41466 Cells of the Embedded
41467 \begin_inset space ~
41473 \begin_layout Section
41477 \begin_layout Standard
41478 Here you can adjust the
41482 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41486 as described in section
41487 \begin_inset space ~
41491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41493 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
41500 \begin_layout Section
41504 \begin_layout Standard
41505 Here you can specify if a citation style using the LaTeX packages
41510 \begin_inset Index idx
41513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41514 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
41524 \begin_inset Index idx
41527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41528 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
41536 Sectioned bibliography
41538 using the LaTeX package
41543 \begin_inset Index idx
41546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41547 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
41552 and you can select a
41556 for the generation of the bibliography.
41557 For a further description see section
41558 \begin_inset space ~
41562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41564 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41571 \begin_layout Section
41575 \begin_layout Standard
41576 Here you can define the
41580 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41582 \begin_inset space ~
41586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41588 reference "sec:Index"
41595 \begin_layout Section
41599 \begin_layout Standard
41600 The PDF properties are explained in section
41601 \begin_inset space ~
41605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41607 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41614 \begin_layout Section
41618 \begin_layout Standard
41619 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
41624 \begin_inset Index idx
41627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41628 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
41638 \begin_inset Index idx
41641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41642 LaTeX-packages ! esint
41652 \begin_inset Index idx
41655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41656 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
41666 \begin_inset Index idx
41669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41670 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
41675 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
41678 \begin_layout Description
41679 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
41680 ensure that you have enabled
41683 \begin_inset space ~
41691 \begin_layout Description
41692 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
41695 \begin_inset space ~
41707 \begin_layout Description
41708 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
41719 \begin_layout Description
41720 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
41722 Chemical Symbols and Equations
41731 \begin_layout Section
41735 \begin_layout Standard
41736 The float placement options are described in the section
41739 \begin_inset space ~
41747 \begin_inset space ~
41755 \begin_layout Section
41759 \begin_layout Standard
41760 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
41762 Program Code Listings
41767 \begin_inset space ~
41775 \begin_layout Section
41779 \begin_layout Standard
41780 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
41788 set to be used and set the
41793 The itemize environment is described in section
41794 \begin_inset space ~
41798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41800 reference "sec:Itemize"
41807 \begin_layout Standard
41808 You can furthermore specify a
41811 \begin_inset space ~
41816 by inserting in this field the LaTeX command of the desired character.
41817 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
41824 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
41826 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41830 \begin_inset space \space{}
41834 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
41844 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
41845 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
41848 \begin_layout Standard
41849 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41857 Some characters require to load special LaTeX-packages in the preamble
41860 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41861 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41863 \begin_inset space ~
41869 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
41873 usepackage{textcomp}
41876 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
41880 usepackage{amssymb}
41890 \begin_layout Section
41894 \begin_layout Standard
41895 Branches are described in section
41896 \begin_inset space ~
41900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41902 reference "sec:Branches"
41909 \begin_layout Section
41911 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41913 name "sec:Doc-Output"
41920 \begin_layout Standard
41921 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
41924 \begin_layout Description
41926 \begin_inset space ~
41930 \begin_inset space ~
41933 Format: The format that is used when you enter
41934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41953 View Master Document
41954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41961 Update Master Document
41962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41969 menu or the toolbar.
41970 The default is set in
41972 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41973 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41975 \begin_inset space ~
41978 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41982 \begin_inset space ~
41986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41988 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41995 \begin_layout Description
41997 \begin_inset space ~
42001 \begin_inset space ~
42004 Output settings for the menu
42006 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42008 \begin_inset space ~
42014 For a detailed description see section
42016 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42021 \begin_inset space ~
42029 \begin_layout Description
42031 \begin_inset space ~
42035 \begin_inset space ~
42038 Options offers settings for the export format
42044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42057 \begin_inset space ~
42062 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42063 \begin_inset space ~
42066 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42070 \begin_inset space ~
42075 settings are described in detail in section
42077 Math Output in XHTML
42082 \begin_inset space ~
42091 \begin_inset space ~
42095 \begin_inset space ~
42100 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42103 \begin_layout Section
42108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42118 \begin_layout Standard
42119 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
42120 or to define LaTeX-commands.
42121 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
42122 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42126 \begin_layout Standard
42127 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
42128 \begin_inset space ~
42132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42134 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
42141 \begin_layout Chapter
42147 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42149 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42154 \begin_inset Index idx
42157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42166 \begin_layout Standard
42167 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42169 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42173 It has the following submenus.
42176 \begin_layout Section
42180 \begin_layout Subsection
42184 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42185 User Interface File
42186 \begin_inset Index idx
42189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42190 Customization ! of toolbars
42196 \begin_inset Index idx
42199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42200 Customization ! of menus
42208 \begin_layout Standard
42209 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42210 interface (ui) file.
42211 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42219 \begin_layout Description
42224 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42227 \begin_layout Description
42234 the menu entries in popup context menus
42237 \begin_layout Description
42242 specifies the toolbar buttons
42245 \begin_layout Standard
42246 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42247 and edit the entries.
42250 \begin_layout Standard
42251 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42263 entries must be finished with an explicit
42288 and in the case of the
42289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42301 The syntax for the entries is:
42304 \begin_layout Standard
42305 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42333 \begin_layout Standard
42335 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42338 All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu
42340 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42353 \begin_inset space ~
42361 \begin_layout Standard
42362 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42368 \begin_layout Standard
42369 For example, assuming you use the menu
42371 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42374 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42378 \begin_layout Standard
42379 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42403 \begin_layout Standard
42405 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42420 to have the sixth bookmark.
42423 \begin_layout Standard
42427 \begin_inset space ~
42432 allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
42433 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42434 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42437 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42444 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42448 \begin_layout Standard
42451 Enable tool tips in main work area
42453 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
42457 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42461 \begin_layout Standard
42464 Restore window layouts and geometries
42466 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
42467 in the last LyX session.
42470 \begin_layout Standard
42473 Restore cursor positions
42475 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
42479 \begin_layout Standard
42482 Load opened files from last session
42484 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
42487 \begin_layout Standard
42490 Clear all session information
42492 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
42493 of last opened documents, etc.).
42496 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42498 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42500 name "sub:Backup documents"
42505 \begin_inset Index idx
42508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42517 \begin_layout Standard
42520 Backup original documents when saving
42522 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
42523 it was saved the last time.
42524 It is stored in the
42527 \begin_inset space ~
42533 \begin_inset space ~
42537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42539 reference "sec:Paths"
42543 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
42546 \begin_inset space ~
42552 The backup file has the file extension
42553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42567 \begin_layout Standard
42570 Backup documents, every
42572 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
42575 \begin_layout Standard
42578 Save documents compressed by default
42580 always saves files in a compressed format.
42583 \begin_layout Standard
42588 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
42591 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42593 \begin_inset space ~
42601 \begin_layout Standard
42604 Open documents in tabs
42606 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX.
42609 \begin_layout Standard
42614 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
42618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42620 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42626 reference "sec:Paths"
42630 for information about LyXServer pipes.
42636 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
42638 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
42641 \begin_layout Standard
42644 Single close-tab button
42646 is checked, there will only be one close button (
42649 \begin_inset Graphics
42650 filename ../images/closetab.png
42657 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
42658 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
42661 \begin_layout Standard
42662 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42670 For the last option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
42678 \begin_layout Subsection
42680 \begin_inset Index idx
42683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42690 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42692 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
42699 \begin_layout Standard
42700 These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX.
42703 \begin_layout Standard
42704 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42712 This section only deals with the fonts
42717 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
42720 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42721 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42732 \begin_layout Standard
42733 By default, LyX uses
42749 (depends on the system) as its
42752 \begin_inset space ~
42768 \begin_layout Standard
42769 You can change the font size with the
42776 \begin_layout Standard
42781 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
42783 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42786 points have the size of 1
42787 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42791 \begin_inset space ~
42795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42797 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
42802 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
42803 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42807 The sizes are explained in detail in section
42808 \begin_inset space ~
42812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42814 reference "sub:Document-Font"
42821 \begin_layout Standard
42824 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
42826 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
42827 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
42828 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
42829 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
42831 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
42832 \begin_inset space ~
42838 \begin_layout Subsection
42840 \begin_inset Index idx
42843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42850 \begin_inset Index idx
42853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42862 \begin_layout Standard
42863 Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in
42864 the list and selecting the
42871 \begin_layout Standard
42872 By checking the option
42876 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
42879 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
42880 \begin_inset space ~
42884 \begin_inset space ~
42889 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
42892 \begin_layout Subsection
42894 \begin_inset Index idx
42897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42906 \begin_layout Standard
42907 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX.
42910 \begin_layout Standard
42915 enables previewing snippets of your document.
42916 This feature is described in section
42917 \begin_inset space ~
42921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42923 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42930 \begin_layout Standard
42931 Checking the option
42934 \begin_inset space ~
42938 \begin_inset space ~
42942 \begin_inset space ~
42947 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
42950 \begin_layout Section
42952 \begin_inset Index idx
42955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42964 \begin_layout Subsection
42968 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42972 \begin_layout Standard
42975 Cursor follows scrollbar
42977 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
42981 \begin_layout Standard
42982 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
42983 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
42984 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
42987 \begin_layout Standard
42990 Scroll below end of document
42992 is self-explanatory.
42995 \begin_layout Standard
42996 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
43003 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43005 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43006 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43009 \begin_layout Standard
43012 Sort environments alphabetically
43014 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43017 \begin_layout Standard
43020 Group environments by their category
43022 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43025 \begin_layout Standard
43030 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43041 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43045 \begin_layout Standard
43046 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43051 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43052 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43056 \begin_layout Subsection
43058 \begin_inset Index idx
43061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43068 \begin_inset Index idx
43071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43072 Settings ! Shortcuts
43080 \begin_layout Standard
43085 specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
43086 Several binding files are available, among them:
43089 \begin_layout Description
43090 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43093 \begin_layout Description
43094 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43106 \begin_layout Description
43107 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43110 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43118 \begin_layout Standard
43119 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43124 , and binding files for special languages.
43125 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43126 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43130 \begin_inset space \space{}
43134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43142 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
43146 \begin_layout Standard
43147 Some binding files, like
43151 , only have a limited scope.
43152 When looking at the end of the file
43156 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43159 \begin_layout Standard
43163 \begin_inset space ~
43167 \begin_inset space ~
43172 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43173 in the selected key binding file.
43176 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43178 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43180 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
43185 \begin_inset Index idx
43188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43189 Key Bindings ! Editing
43197 \begin_layout Standard
43198 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43199 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
43200 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43203 Show key-bindings containing
43206 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43207 Insert there for example as keyword
43208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43215 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43216 functions that contain
43217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43225 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43226 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
43230 that you will find in the
43237 \begin_layout Standard
43238 For example, to add the shortcut
43246 , select the function and press the
43251 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43252 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43255 \begin_layout Standard
43256 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43257 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX
43258 Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the
43259 different function names as a semicolon separated list.
43260 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43265 \begin_layout Standard
43266 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43269 \begin_layout Standard
43270 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43272 The syntax of the entries is:
43275 \begin_layout Standard
43281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43299 \begin_layout Subsection
43301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43303 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
43308 \begin_inset Index idx
43311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43318 \begin_inset Index idx
43321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43322 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43330 \begin_layout Standard
43331 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43332 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
43333 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43334 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43337 \begin_inset space ~
43341 \begin_inset space ~
43346 and select the keyboard map file named
43353 \begin_layout Standard
43362 keyboard map and, if you use the
43366 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43369 arg "keymap-primary"
43375 arg "keymap-secondary"
43378 respectively or toggle between them with
43381 arg "keymap-toggle"
43387 \begin_layout Standard
43388 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43396 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43405 \begin_layout Standard
43406 You can also specify the mouse
43408 Wheel scrolling speed
43411 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43415 \begin_layout Standard
43423 \begin_inset space ~
43427 \begin_inset space ~
43432 you can select a key for zooming.
43433 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
43436 \begin_layout Subsection
43440 \begin_layout Standard
43441 Input completion is described in section
43442 \begin_inset space ~
43446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43448 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
43455 \begin_layout Section
43457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43464 \begin_inset Index idx
43467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43474 \begin_inset Index idx
43477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43486 \begin_layout Standard
43487 The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during
43489 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
43492 \begin_layout Description
43494 \begin_inset space ~
43497 directory This is LyX's working directory.
43498 It is the default when you
43509 \begin_inset space ~
43517 \begin_layout Description
43519 \begin_inset space ~
43522 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
43524 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43526 \begin_inset space ~
43530 \begin_inset space ~
43538 \begin_layout Description
43540 \begin_inset space ~
43543 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
43549 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43553 \begin_inset Newline newline
43557 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43569 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
43577 \begin_layout Description
43579 \begin_inset space ~
43583 \begin_inset Index idx
43586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43592 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
43593 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
43594 \begin_inset space ~
43598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43600 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43608 will be used to save the backups.
43609 \begin_inset Newline newline
43612 Backup files have the ending
43613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43623 \begin_layout Description
43628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43636 \begin_inset space ~
43639 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
43640 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
43641 \begin_inset Newline newline
43648 You add a BibTeX-database
43653 You can edit this file with the program
43662 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
43665 \begin_inset space ~
43671 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
43676 and click on the LyX-symbol.
43677 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
43683 and LyX need to be running the same time.
43684 \begin_inset Newline newline
43687 The pipe is also used for the
43692 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43698 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43703 \begin_inset Newline newline
43706 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
43707 \begin_inset Newline newline
43723 \begin_layout Description
43725 \begin_inset space ~
43728 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
43731 \begin_layout Description
43733 \begin_inset space ~
43736 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
43737 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
43738 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
43741 \begin_layout Description
43743 \begin_inset space ~
43746 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
43752 You only need to specify it if you are using
43756 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
43762 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
43766 \begin_layout Description
43768 \begin_inset space ~
43771 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
43772 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see
43773 where to find it on the system.
43774 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
43775 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
43777 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43784 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
43785 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
43788 \begin_layout Description
43790 \begin_inset space ~
43793 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
43794 which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the
43796 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
43798 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
43799 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
43800 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
43801 scanned for the input files.
43802 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
43803 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
43804 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
43805 compilation may fail for some documents.
43808 \begin_layout Section
43812 \begin_layout Standard
43813 Here you can insert your
43822 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
43824 \begin_inset space ~
43828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43830 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43834 , to mark changes you make as yours.
43837 \begin_layout Section
43839 \begin_inset Index idx
43842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43843 Language ! Settings
43849 \begin_inset Index idx
43852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43853 Settings ! Language
43861 \begin_layout Subsection
43863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43865 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
43872 \begin_layout Description
43874 \begin_inset space ~
43878 \begin_inset space ~
43881 language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus.
43882 You can find its actual translation status here:
43883 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43885 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
43892 \begin_layout Description
43894 \begin_inset space ~
43897 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
43899 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
43900 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
43901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43917 The most widespread language package is
43922 \begin_inset Index idx
43925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43926 LaTeX-packages ! babel
43931 ; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
43932 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
43933 alternative language package
43938 \begin_inset Index idx
43941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43942 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
43947 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
43948 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
43954 The available selections are described in section
43955 \begin_inset space ~
43959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43961 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
43968 \begin_layout Description
43970 \begin_inset space ~
43973 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
43974 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
43975 An example is the start command
43981 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
43986 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44001 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44006 \begin_layout Description
44008 \begin_inset space ~
44016 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44017 command toggles the package on and off.
44020 \begin_layout Description
44022 \begin_inset space ~
44026 \begin_inset space ~
44029 Point Define the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44033 \begin_layout Description
44035 \begin_inset space ~
44039 \begin_inset space ~
44042 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44043 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44044 used by all LaTeX-packages.
44045 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44052 \begin_layout Description
44054 \begin_inset space ~
44057 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44059 When this option is not set, the
44062 \begin_inset space ~
44067 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
44068 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44071 \begin_inset space ~
44079 \begin_layout Description
44081 \begin_inset space ~
44087 \begin_inset space ~
44093 When it is not set, the
44096 \begin_inset space ~
44101 is set to the end of the document.
44104 \begin_layout Description
44106 \begin_inset space ~
44110 \begin_inset space ~
44113 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44114 language will be underlined in blue.
44117 \begin_layout Description
44119 \begin_inset space ~
44123 \begin_inset space ~
44126 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44127 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44130 \begin_layout Description
44132 \begin_inset space ~
44135 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44136 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44137 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44138 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44141 \begin_layout Subsection
44145 \begin_layout Standard
44146 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44147 \begin_inset space ~
44151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44153 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44160 \begin_layout Section
44164 \begin_layout Subsection
44168 \begin_layout Description
44170 \begin_inset space ~
44174 \begin_inset space ~
44177 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44180 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44181 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44183 \begin_inset space ~
44189 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44192 \begin_layout Description
44194 \begin_inset space ~
44198 \begin_inset Index idx
44201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44208 \begin_inset Index idx
44211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44212 Settings ! Date format
44217 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44218 \begin_inset Newline newline
44222 \begin_inset Flex URL
44225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44227 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
44233 \begin_inset Newline newline
44236 For example the format
44237 \begin_inset Newline newline
44241 \begin_inset Newline newline
44244 prints the date as day/month/year.
44247 \begin_layout Description
44249 \begin_inset space ~
44253 \begin_inset space ~
44256 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
44259 \begin_layout Description
44261 \begin_inset space ~
44264 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44266 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44268 \begin_inset space ~
44274 For a detailed description see section
44276 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44281 \begin_inset space ~
44289 \begin_layout Subsection
44291 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44298 \begin_inset Index idx
44301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44308 \begin_inset Index idx
44311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44320 \begin_layout Description
44322 \begin_inset space ~
44325 printer Here you can specify the name of your
44330 The name will be used when the
44335 \begin_inset Newline newline
44339 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44347 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
44355 \begin_layout Description
44357 \begin_inset space ~
44360 command is the command LyX
44361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44365 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44368 LaTeX uses for printing.
44376 \begin_layout Description
44378 \begin_inset space ~
44382 \begin_inset space ~
44385 Options Here you can specify printer options.
44386 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
44387 of the program that provides the
44394 \begin_layout Description
44396 \begin_inset space ~
44400 \begin_inset space ~
44404 \begin_inset space ~
44407 printer This option works only for the
44412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44424 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
44425 This is an option only for dvips experts.
44428 \begin_layout Subsection
44433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44443 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
44448 \begin_inset Index idx
44451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44460 \begin_layout Description
44462 \begin_inset space ~
44469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44477 \begin_inset space ~
44481 \begin_inset space ~
44484 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
44489 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
44510 are used for Cyrillic.
44511 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
44512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44524 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
44525 LyX sets up in the background.
44526 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
44529 \begin_layout Description
44531 \begin_inset space ~
44535 \begin_inset space ~
44538 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
44543 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
44546 \begin_layout Description
44548 \begin_inset space ~
44552 \begin_inset space ~
44556 \begin_inset space ~
44560 \begin_inset space ~
44563 options They only have an effect when the program
44567 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
44570 \begin_layout Standard
44571 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
44572 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
44573 manuals of the applications.
44576 \begin_layout Description
44578 \begin_inset space ~
44581 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
44582 \begin_inset space ~
44586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44588 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
44595 \begin_layout Description
44597 \begin_inset space ~
44600 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
44601 \begin_inset space ~
44605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44607 reference "sub:Index-Program"
44614 \begin_layout Description
44616 \begin_inset space ~
44619 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
44620 \begin_inset space ~
44624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44626 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
44633 \begin_layout Description
44638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44646 \begin_inset space ~
44649 command Command for the program
44653 that is described in the section
44659 Additional Features
44664 \begin_layout Standard
44665 There are additionally the following options:
44668 \begin_layout Description
44670 \begin_inset space ~
44674 \begin_inset space ~
44678 \begin_inset space ~
44682 \begin_inset space ~
44686 \begin_inset space ~
44689 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
44690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44707 to separate folders.
44708 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
44709 \begin_inset Index idx
44712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44719 \begin_inset Index idx
44722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44731 \begin_layout Description
44733 \begin_inset space ~
44737 \begin_inset space ~
44741 \begin_inset space ~
44745 \begin_inset space ~
44749 \begin_inset space ~
44753 \begin_inset space ~
44756 changes Removes all manually set
44762 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44763 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44765 \begin_inset space ~
44770 dialog when changing the document class.
44773 \begin_layout Section
44775 \begin_inset space ~
44779 \begin_inset Index idx
44782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44791 \begin_layout Subsection
44793 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44795 name "sub:Converters"
44800 \begin_inset Index idx
44803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44812 \begin_layout Standard
44813 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
44814 from one format to another.
44815 You can modify converters or create new ones.
44816 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
44823 \begin_inset space ~
44828 field and press the
44833 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
44837 \begin_inset space ~
44842 drop-down list, modify the
44846 field and press the
44853 \begin_layout Standard
44856 Converter File Cache
44862 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
44864 Maximum Age (in days
44867 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
44868 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
44871 \begin_layout Standard
44872 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
44873 definition, is described in the section
44884 \begin_layout Subsection
44886 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44888 name "sec:File-Formats"
44893 \begin_inset Index idx
44896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44903 \begin_inset Index idx
44906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44915 \begin_layout Standard
44916 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
44925 programs that should be used for certain formats.
44928 \begin_layout Standard
44929 You can also define the
44931 Default output format
44933 that is used when you use
44935 View, Update, View Master Document
44939 Update Master Document
44945 menu or the toolbar.
44948 \begin_layout Standard
44949 More about formats and their options is described in the section
44960 \begin_layout Standard
44961 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
44962 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
44963 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
44964 This is done by specifying a
44969 More about this is described in the section
44980 \begin_layout Chapter
44981 Units available in LyX
44982 \begin_inset Index idx
44985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44992 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44994 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45001 \begin_layout Standard
45003 \begin_inset space ~
45007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45009 reference "tab:Units"
45013 explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation.
45016 \begin_layout Standard
45017 \begin_inset Float table
45023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45024 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45027 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45042 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45050 \begin_inset Tabular
45051 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
45052 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
45053 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45054 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45150 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45154 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45182 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45205 scaled point (65536
45206 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45210 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45234 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45238 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45262 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45266 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45270 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45294 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45321 % of original image width
45328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45510 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45514 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45535 \begin_layout Chapter
45537 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45539 name "chap:Credits"
45546 \begin_layout Standard
45547 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
45548 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
45551 \begin_layout Itemize
45554 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
45557 \begin_layout Itemize
45563 \begin_layout Itemize
45569 \begin_layout Itemize
45575 \begin_layout Itemize
45581 \begin_layout Itemize
45587 \begin_layout Itemize
45593 \begin_layout Itemize
45599 \begin_layout Itemize
45602 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
45605 \begin_layout Itemize
45611 \begin_layout Itemize
45617 \begin_layout Itemize
45623 \begin_layout Itemize
45629 \begin_layout Itemize
45635 \begin_layout Itemize
45641 \begin_layout Itemize
45647 \begin_layout Itemize
45653 \begin_layout Itemize
45655 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45664 \begin_layout Standard
45665 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
45668 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
45675 \begin_layout Bibliography
45676 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45677 LatexCommand bibitem
45684 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45687 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
45692 \begin_inset Newline newline
45696 \begin_inset Flex URL
45699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45701 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
45709 \begin_layout Bibliography
45710 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45711 LatexCommand bibitem
45712 key "latexcompanion"
45716 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
45718 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
45721 Addison-Wesley, 2004
45724 \begin_layout Bibliography
45725 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45726 LatexCommand bibitem
45731 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
45734 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
45737 Addison-Wesley, 2003
45740 \begin_layout Bibliography
45741 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45742 LatexCommand bibitem
45749 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
45752 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
45755 \begin_layout Bibliography
45756 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45757 LatexCommand bibitem
45769 Addison-Wesley, 1984
45772 \begin_layout Bibliography
45773 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45774 LatexCommand bibitem
45780 \begin_inset Newline newline
45784 \begin_inset Flex URL
45787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45789 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
45797 \begin_layout Bibliography
45798 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45799 LatexCommand bibitem
45805 \begin_inset Newline newline
45809 \begin_inset Flex URL
45812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45814 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
45822 \begin_layout Bibliography
45823 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45824 LatexCommand bibitem
45830 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45832 name "Documentation"
45833 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
45842 \begin_inset Newline newline
45846 \begin_inset Flex URL
45849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45851 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
45859 \begin_layout Bibliography
45860 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45861 LatexCommand bibitem
45867 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45869 name "Documentation"
45870 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
45874 how to use the program
45879 \begin_inset Newline newline
45883 \begin_inset Flex URL
45886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45888 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
45896 \begin_layout Bibliography
45897 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45898 LatexCommand bibitem
45904 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45906 name "Documentation"
45907 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
45916 \begin_inset Newline newline
45920 \begin_inset Flex URL
45923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45925 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
45933 \begin_layout Bibliography
45934 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45935 LatexCommand bibitem
45941 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45943 name "Documentation"
45944 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
45953 \begin_inset Newline newline
45957 \begin_inset Flex URL
45960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45962 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
45970 \begin_layout Bibliography
45971 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45972 LatexCommand bibitem
45978 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45980 name "Documentation"
45981 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
45985 of the AMS LaTeX-packages:
45986 \begin_inset Newline newline
45990 \begin_inset Flex URL
45993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45995 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46003 \begin_layout Bibliography
46004 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46005 LatexCommand bibitem
46011 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46013 name "Documentation"
46014 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46018 of the LaTeX-package
46023 \begin_inset Index idx
46026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46027 LaTeX-packages ! caption
46033 \begin_inset Newline newline
46037 \begin_inset Flex URL
46040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46042 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46050 \begin_layout Bibliography
46051 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46052 LatexCommand bibitem
46058 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46060 name "Documentation"
46061 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46065 of the LaTeX-package
46070 \begin_inset Index idx
46073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46074 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
46080 \begin_inset Newline newline
46084 \begin_inset Flex URL
46087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46089 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46097 \begin_layout Bibliography
46098 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46099 LatexCommand bibitem
46105 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46107 name "Documentation"
46108 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46112 of the LaTeX-package
46117 \begin_inset Index idx
46120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46121 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
46127 \begin_inset Newline newline
46131 \begin_inset Flex URL
46134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46136 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46144 \begin_layout Bibliography
46145 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46146 LatexCommand bibitem
46152 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46154 name "Documentation"
46155 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46159 of the LaTeX-package
46164 \begin_inset Index idx
46167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46168 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
46174 \begin_inset Newline newline
46178 \begin_inset Flex URL
46181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46183 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46191 \begin_layout Bibliography
46192 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46193 LatexCommand bibitem
46199 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46201 name "Documentation"
46202 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46206 of the LaTeX-package
46211 \begin_inset Index idx
46214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46215 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
46221 \begin_inset Newline newline
46225 \begin_inset Flex URL
46228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46230 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
46238 \begin_layout Bibliography
46239 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46240 LatexCommand bibitem
46246 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46248 name "Documentation"
46249 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
46253 of the LaTeX-package
46258 \begin_inset Index idx
46261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46262 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
46268 \begin_inset Newline newline
46272 \begin_inset Flex URL
46275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46277 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46285 \begin_layout Bibliography
46286 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46287 LatexCommand bibitem
46293 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46295 name "Documentation"
46296 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46300 of the LaTeX-package
46305 \begin_inset Index idx
46308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46309 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
46315 \begin_inset Newline newline
46319 \begin_inset Flex URL
46322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46324 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46332 \begin_layout Bibliography
46333 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46334 LatexCommand bibitem
46340 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46343 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
46347 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
46348 \begin_inset Newline newline
46352 \begin_inset Flex URL
46355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46357 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
46365 \begin_layout Bibliography
46366 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46367 LatexCommand bibitem
46373 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46376 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
46380 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
46381 \begin_inset Newline newline
46385 \begin_inset Flex URL
46388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46390 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
46398 \begin_layout Bibliography
46399 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46400 LatexCommand bibitem
46406 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46409 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
46413 how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages:
46414 \begin_inset Newline newline
46418 \begin_inset Flex URL
46421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46423 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
46431 \begin_layout Bibliography
46432 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46433 LatexCommand bibitem
46439 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46442 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
46446 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
46447 \begin_inset Newline newline
46451 \begin_inset Flex URL
46454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46456 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
46464 \begin_layout Bibliography
46465 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46466 LatexCommand bibitem
46472 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46475 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
46479 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
46480 \begin_inset Newline newline
46484 \begin_inset Flex URL
46487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46489 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
46497 \begin_layout Bibliography
46498 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46499 LatexCommand bibitem
46505 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46508 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
46512 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
46513 \begin_inset Newline newline
46517 \begin_inset Flex URL
46520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46522 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
46530 \begin_layout Bibliography
46531 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46532 LatexCommand bibitem
46538 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46541 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
46545 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
46546 \begin_inset Newline newline
46550 \begin_inset Flex URL
46553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46555 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
46563 \begin_layout Bibliography
46564 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46565 LatexCommand bibitem
46571 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46574 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
46578 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
46579 \begin_inset Newline newline
46583 \begin_inset Flex URL
46586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46588 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
46596 \begin_layout Bibliography
46597 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46598 LatexCommand bibitem
46604 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46607 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
46611 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
46612 \begin_inset Newline newline
46616 \begin_inset Flex URL
46619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46621 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
46629 \begin_layout Bibliography
46630 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46631 LatexCommand bibitem
46637 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46640 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
46644 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
46645 \begin_inset Newline newline
46649 \begin_inset Flex URL
46652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46654 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
46662 \begin_layout Bibliography
46663 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46664 LatexCommand bibitem
46670 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46673 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
46677 about new features in
46682 \begin_inset Newline newline
46686 \begin_inset Flex URL
46689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46691 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
46699 \begin_layout Standard
46700 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46734 \begin_inset Note Note
46737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46744 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
46745 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
46746 bibliography is the second one:
46754 \begin_layout Standard
46755 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
46756 LatexCommand bibtex
46757 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
46758 options "biblio/alphadin"
46765 \begin_layout Standard
46766 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
46769 \begin_layout Standard
46770 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
46771 LatexCommand printnomenclature
46777 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
46778 LatexCommand printindex